Home

AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband

1. AEM NB R1 5 4 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Controlled Objects mmm ee 3 Select View gt Controlled Objects The Controlled Objects Table appears User Sdministration Figure 4 33 Controlled Objects Table AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 29 User Management Controlled Objects 4 Select one controlled object type in the Controlled Object Type field and click Open The Controlled Object Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected controlled object Controlled Object Profile Window Controlled Object Type ME Value 1 Domains Mot assigned Domains ssigned Domain AIAL Beer hig OK aves __Slese__ Figure 4 34 Window Controlled Object Profile Adding to To assign the selected controlled object to further domains select one or more Domains domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 Removing from To remove the selected controlled object from domains select one or more do Domains mains in the Domains Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The EM object generated by default is protected against deletion Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply AEM NB R1 5 4 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Controlled Objects Other Fields The
2. 932 line 2W Programmable Special Coin PRCOIN a k a PROG1_ CF 16 line ANSI ISDN ISDN AP a k a ISDN16_u AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 1 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview Le AFM_DS33 The Access Feeder Multiplexer card provides a DS3 AIM interface for ADSL traffic one or more AFMs the in right most AP slot s ADSL4 The Quad ADSI packs provide four ADSL subscriber line terminations each Metallic Distribution Server Units MDSUs The AnyMedia Access System supports the MDS2 and MDS2B shelves Chapter 5 1 1 1 page 5 3 for installation of SLC carrier channel units Only narrowband transmission is planned for this shelf MDS2 MDS2B shelves are connected via an electrical inter face through one or two Metallic Distribution Server Units APs that in effect extend the PCM Highway from the AnyMedia Access Sys tem backplane to the MDS2 MDS2B An MDSU can be located in any AP slot however the MDSUs will normally be located in AP slots 14 and 15 to simplify shelf cabling One MDSU extends 1 5 PCM Highways to a controller MSC in the MDS2 MDS82B Shelf In order to extend 3 PCM Highways to both sections of the MDS2 MDS2B Shelf two MDSUs must be installed MSU100 SAPQADMBAA IO_DS1 TN Q pa Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack
3. sparc solaris Version 1 1c Run Time OK No previous package LuOXNS have been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt Where should OrbixNames be installed opt lu cent OrbixNames1l 1c q 16 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Multi threaded Orbix installation detected is this correct y y n We Type y and press Return Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent j W W Enter selection q 18 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 13 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXNS gt y n 19 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOXNS
4. 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol AEM NB R1 5 2 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next one The first can be modified at installation time to a value between 1024 and 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 IP multicast adresses Using OrbixTalk all communications takes place using multicast addresses The range of IP mul ticast addresses used by OrbixTalk is 31 with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is config urable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 5 The Install_AMEMR15 script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 6 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths usr bin usr sbin and usr ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 7 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continu
5. R Radio button 3 15 Reaction to fault identification 1 23 Recovery 1 23 Refresh workspace menu 3 13 Remote Operations Channel definition A 2 Remote Operations Channel protocol profiles A 4 Remote Operations Channel protocol A 4 Repetitive Alarm 6 8 Restart Workspace Manager workspace menu 3 13 Restore database 3 23 Restore command 3 26 Return key 3 6 RLS LPBK 6 30 ROC over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 5 Router definition A 2 ee S Safety Classification XV SCHED EX 6 28 screen navigation equipment configuration 5 14 Semi Permanent Leased Line definition A 2 Server application Definition 3 17 restart 3 18 shut down 3 19 start options 3 17 Start up 3 19 Server applications Alarm management 3 18 Configuration management 3 18 Network element management 3 18 System core 3 18 Server applications of AEM 3 18 o Server applications start up via a command line 3 20 Shelf protection COMDAC 5 60 IO DS1 5 63 Shelf view 5 23 Shuffle Up Down workspace menu 3 13 Software installation 1 19 copy 5 116 download 5 113 upgrade 5 113 Sorting Alarms 6 17 Spin box 3 15 sreen navigation service provisioning 5 71 Standby card test scheduling 6 28 Status Bar 5 9 5 11 Sub NetworkController 5 122 SWVR_ILLEGAL 6 40 Synchronization alarm data 6 33 configuration data 6 32 System security 1 26 System Administration application 3 18 System core 3 18 System Internal Events 1 12
6. NE alarm indication if they exist and starts an alarms and environment alarms synchronization process between the AEM NB alarm database and active NE alarms Finally the AEM NB will try to update its view of NE configuration data and will start a synchronization process between the AEM NB data set and the NE configuration information NE NVDS The NE database is always the master AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 6 1 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management ee The database does not maintain the alarm history it only stores the current alarms status An alarm can be in one of the following three states Raised m Acknowledged Cleared The main responsibilities of the Alarm Management Subsystem AMS are the fol lowing Maintain up to date alarm information m Notify alarm changes to alarm clients m Provide access to the current alarm data m Manage alarms raising m Manage cleared alarms m Manage acknowledgment of alarms m Synchronization of the alarm data per NE m AEM NB Alarm log handling m Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information During the alarm life time the AEM NB updates the following information m The date and time of the last status change m The last alarm status change m The last user id which acknowledged an alarm The number of times the alarm has occurred between the first occurrence and now If an acknowledged alarm is raised aga
7. Ongoing Tasks Figure 5 15 COMDAC Window AEM NB R1 5 5 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nn The following table shows the view edit options of the COMDAC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the COMDAC is plugged in Slot format comdac 1 1 2 Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value COMDAC Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value COM100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes SW Version Obtained from the NE at connection time In ternally the AEM NB will have to verify whether the men tioned SW Version is manageable by the system Program Code Code of the SW currently stor
8. Parameters Buttons NE Name Slot Inventory Infor mation Operation amp Protection Description Action NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot number where the PTU is plugged in Possible values ptu 1 1 2 The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values PTU Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value BDJ200 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted The Apply button is available only if the required state of MSC has been modified by the operator 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 363 211 402
9. To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 For carrying out the next three steps 10 11 and 12 please pay attention to Table 4 1 It provides an overview about the access permissions the user groups shall have Table 4 1 Assignment of User Groups to Applications Tasks Application System Administration User Administration and Profiling Log Viewer Alarm Viewer Configuration Manager BroadBand EM Task User Group Start up Shutdown Administrator Monitoring Administrator Access Policy Administrator Management Domain Management Administrator Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Administrator Maintenance NE Creation Administrator Maintenance Equipment and Administrator Maintenance Service Provisioning View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Cut through Administrator BroadBand EM Administrator Maintenance Monitoring a lf the VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group But the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks until the VIEW task is assigned again AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 User Management User Groups The most of the task names are self described but
10. Contents 5 3 2 1 9 Configure CU 5 3 2 2 NE Synchronization 5 3 2 2 1 Configuration Information Synchronization 5 3 2 2 2 Alarm Information Synchronization 5 3 2 3 NE Inventory Data 5 3 2 4 Configuration of Timing Source 5 3 2 5 Set Date and Time 5 3 2 6 Configure Simplex COMDAC Protection Scheme 5 3 2 7 Protection Switching 5 3 2 7 1 COMDAC Protection Switching 5 3 2 7 2 IO DS1 Protection Switching 5 3 2 8 Alarm Configuration 9 3 3 Delete NE 5 4 Service Provisioning 5 4 1 Edit Network Interface 5 4 2 Logical DS1 List 5 4 3 Creation of VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 Cross Connection 5 4 4 Change Voice Frequency Data Enhancement VFDE for TR 303 VRTs 5 4 5 Edit VRT VB Logical Feeder 5 4 6 Delete VRT VB Logical Feeder 5 4 7 Add VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 4 7 1 Service Details GSFN DFLT 5 4 7 2 Service Details GSFN 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX 5 4 7 3 Service Details GSFN 2RVO 5 4 7 4 Service Details GSFN 2NOS 5 4 7 5 Service Details GSFN BRI 5 4 7 6 Service Details GSFN TO 5 4 7 7 Service Details GSFN DX4N DX4R FX 5 4 7 8 Service Details GSFN EM4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 5 4 7 9 Service Details GSFN ETO4 5 4 7 10 Service Details GSFN DPT 5 4 7 11 Service Details GSFN FXO 5 4 7 12 Service Details GSFN OCU 1 2 3 5 4 7 13 Service Details GSFN SW56 5 4 7 14 Service Details GSFN TD AEM NB R1 5 S II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Contents 5 4 7 15 Service Details GSFN T04 5 110 5 4 7 16 Overview of A
11. T Select one or more user groups that shall have access to the new domain in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add AEM NB R1 5 4 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Domains gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 17 8 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new domain does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 3 2 page 4 11 4 3 2 Modify Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information of a domain e g which devices it includes etc Before modifying the information of a domain the AEM NB administrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information of a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 13 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User Administratio File view Help Figure 4 14 Window User Administration AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 11 User Management Domains Eee 3 Select View gt Domains The Domains Table appears User Administration Figure 4 15 Domains Table AEM NB R1 5 4 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Domains Chang
12. lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuRWRT 1log Installation of lt LURWRT gt was successful OrbixMT 2 3c patch Processing package instance lt LuOX23RT gt from 02 Installation lt tmp lucent_pkg 3 gt Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris Version 2 3cO2MT Run Time OK No previous package LuOX23RT have been found gt NOTE A list of partitions and free space is displayed Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on W lt information about your partitions and free space gt Where should Orbix be installed opt lu cent OrbixMT_2 3c2 q 12 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 11 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe If you intend to use Orbix to communicate with anything outside your own subnet you will need to supply your subnet s domain name If your machines all have fully qualified host names reply with the value null What is your domain name es lucent com 13 Type your domain name and press Return or reply null if all machines have fully qualified host names press Return to accept default Se
13. m Alt Alternate is pressed in combination with one or more other keys thereby assigning these keys another meaning m Backspace Or Del Delete to delete all characters to the left of the cursor Conventions The keys on the keyboard are represented in the text in the following way Ctrl Backspace A B Two or more of these keys connected by a hyphen indicate that they must be pressed simultaneously Shift Ctr1 A for example means that the A key must be typed while holding down Shift and Ctrl Keys that are separated by blanks only must be pressed one after the other Esc A B for example means that Esc must be pressed first followed by A and then B 3 3 2 Mouse Conventions When using the mouse you will frequently find the following terms m Click or Select Position the cursor on an object and press the left mouse button Double click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession m Drag Move the mouse keeping the left mouse button pressed AEM NB R1 5 3 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows 3 3 3 Different Aspects of the Cursor The aspect of the cursor will vary to indicate the actions you may currently under take using the mouse The following symbols show examples for possible cursor aspects AN The arrow up pointing to the left is used to select objects and to press buttons T The I beam is used within a text fi
14. q 67 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Package lt LUOXWRT gt OrbixWeb Version 3 0 Run Time have been found in lt OrbixWeb path gt AEM NB R1 5 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Package lt LUJRERT gt jre 1 1 7 have been found in lt jre path gt Package lt LuUANY16en gt Help have been found in lt Help path gt WARNING Netscape release 4 5 is necessary to run the AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 Help and the AnyMe dia Broad Band application If it is already in Stalled on the system please answer y to next question otherwise answer q to exit or n to continue the AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 Client instal lation In this case when the Netscape release 4 5 will be installed the following variables must be modified according the Netscape instal lation settings in the AnyMediaNBEM _GUI sh file PATH to add the Netscape path MOZILLA HOME to store the Netscape path For instance if Netscape release 4 5 is in stalled on opt appl Netscape4 5 the variables shall be modified as follows PATH opt appl Netscape4 5 other_paths MOZILLA HOME opt appl Netscape4 5 Is Netscape release 4 5 already installed on the system y n 68 Type y if Netscape is already installed on the system and press Return otherwise type n and press Return gt NOTE The following questio
15. All Alarms Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected filter criteria AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 19 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring E SeSe Selecting Filter Proceed as follows to select the desired filter option Step Procedure 1 Select the desired filter options If you want to view then select Filters gt Result Notes all alarms which have Alarms for the last 24 hours The alarms are dis been changed in the played according to the last 24 hours selected filter all critical raised Critical Raised Alarms The alarms are dis alarms played according to the selected filter all raised alarms Raised Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all alarms from a host Alarms from a Host s Continue with step 2 all not cleared critical Critical Alarms not cleared The alarms are dis alarms played according to the selected filter all owned acknowl Owned Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis edge alarms played according to the selected filter all cleared alarms Clear Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all acknowledge All Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis alarms played according to the selected filter all alarms None Filter All Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The same filter option can be selected viathe option m
16. ICC Indicates the interchangeability among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the issue number and n the Series Num ber SW Version Obtained from the NE at connection time In ternally the AEM NB will have to verify whether the men tioned SW Version is manageable by the system Only appli cable to the COMDACs or the shelves where the shelf back plane version will be displayed Program Equipment Code Code of the SW currently stored in the plug in Only applicable to the COMDAC Summary Circuit Pack Type Displays a mnemonic that identifies the circuit pack type Possible values are cf Table 5 3 page 5 50 Number of Units Displays two numbers the number of plug in units and the number of unplugged units Table 5 3 Card Information Possible Values Card Type Apparatus Code CLEI FAST Shelf number COMDAC COM100 SLC1CGOCAA lO_DS1 FAC 100 SLC1EJOCAA AEM NB R1 5 5 50 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning 363 211 402 Card Type CTU PROG2W POTS32 PRCOIN ISDN16_U AFM_DS33 ADSL4 MDSU MSC v S C ERRER ERI EREEREER EE R ER le EE SLE os Mea leeke mon ere SSe oje ejo o eje oj 2 Equipment Configuration Apparatus Code CLEI DTP100 LPA380 LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 LPA900 LPA400 MSU100 MSC100 BDJ200 AUA293 SPQ429 SPQ442 AUA41B AUA45B AUA75 SPQ452 AUA200 AUA232 SPQ444 SPQ454 MCU 520
17. Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information or profile of a user Before modifying the information or profile of a user please pay attention to the following remarks To modify the information or profile of a user the AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The AEM NB administrator is not able to change the system login informa tion of a user i e system login and password Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information or profile of a user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up an OYO CERF e Figure 4 4 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up showing the Users Table AEM NB R1 5 4 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User User Administration vert Default EM Administrator Figure 4 5 Users Table 3 Select one user of the Login Name field and click Open The User Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user User Profile a Figure 4 6 Window User Profile AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 5 User Management Change User Name Description Adding to User Groups Removing from User Groups Other Fields read only User To change the user name description like last name first name
18. There are three ways to start the server applications at boot time Root can configure the system at the installation so that Level 1 applica tions only or Level 1 and all Level 2 applications start at boot time m viacommand line The administrator can start Level 1 applications or Level 1 and all Level 2 applications via command line m via GUI The administrator can start any desired Level 2 application from the GUI once Level 1 is already running AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 17 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown a SeSe 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications The AEM NB consists of four server applications The following list gives their names and uses System core Provides basic functionalities and is needed by all applications If this server application is shut down all other applications are shut down and all client applications are notified of the shutdown m Configuration management needed by the configuration management application cf Chapter 5 If this server application is shut down the configuration management application will no longer run m Alarm management needed by the fault alarm management application cf Chapter 6 If this server application is shut down the fault alarm management application will no longer run m Network element management Needed for operations which affect NEs If this server application is shut down operations with NEs can no longer b
19. level 3 28 schedules 3 28 types 3 24 Backup database 3 23 Bridge definition A 2 Built in self test 6 29 Buttons often used Apply 3 15 Cancel 3 15 Close 3 15 Edit 3 15 OK 315 C Cancel button 3 15 CD ROM XVI Channel Unit 5 4 Check box 3 14 CIT port protocol profiles A 3_ Click mouse 3 6 Client application 3 17 Close button 3 15 COMDAC protection mode simplex 5 58 5 60 COMDAC Protection State 5 59 Comments on document XVII Communications Info 5 19 Configuration data synchronization 6 32 Configuration management 3 18 Connection State 5 19 Connection states NE AEM 6 31 Control key 3 6 Controlled Objects 4 28 Core application 3 17 Craft interface terminal A 2 Create domain 4 8 user 4 2 user group 4 1 7 Cursor aspects 3 7 Cursor menu 3 11 D Data Communications Network definition A 2 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 IN 1 Index Database Archive 3 23 Backup 3 23 Full backup 3 23 Incremental backup 3 24 Off line backup 3 24 On line backup 3 24 Restore 3 23 Databases AEM NB 3 24 DCN configurations A 5 DCN introduction A 1_ DCN over X 25 A 9 Deinstall AEM 3 20 Deinstallation commands 3 20 Delete domain 4 14 user 4 6 user group 4 26 Delete key 3 6 disk space 2 2 Documentation XV Comment procedure XVII Packaging and format XVI Domain Create 4 8 Delete 4 14 Modify 4 11 Double click mouse 3 6 Drag mouse 3 6 Drop down list box 3 15
20. m The hardware required to install the AEM NB R1 5 AnyMedia Element Manager for Narrowband Services R1 5 is prepared m The AEM NB R1 5 consists of a number of server and client applications The software install may imply the installation of all these applications or only some of them JRE m The AEM NB R1 5 includes as part of its environment the Java Runtime Environment JRE Release 1 1 7 JRE is included here free of charge for the final user 2 1 1 Introduction This document is intended as a guide for the person s who will be responsible for Svetem keane the installation and configuration of the hardware and software required for the E as AEM NB R1 5 installation ments The AEM NB R1 5 runs on Sun SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus security and Y2000 patches and 106255 01 patch recommended by SUN The AnyMedia distribution can be divided into two parts Server side installation and Client side installation Both include the specific Third party applications needed to run the AnyMedia successfully Disk Space To store the AEM NB R1 5 files your system must have the following amount of free disk space m AEM NB client 60 MB m AEM NB server The space will depend upon the number of NEs managed by the system because of the data size The recommended size for n NEs is obtained from adding the following numbers in kbyte software 450000 logs 15000 databases 1400 600 n transactions 2 800 350 n n 25
21. 0 15 step 1 Default 7 Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 103 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 7 8 Service Details GSFN EM4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 Overview EM4 C H 4 wire E amp M Type I and Type Il The E amp M function is used in PBX tie trunks to provide the E amp M signaling interface It is applicable to the SPQ454 chan nel unit which is intended for used in PBX tie trunks and it can interface with a PBX or other transmission equipment PLR 1 2 4 wire pulse link repeater Type and Type II The primary application of the PLR function is also in PBX tie trunks providing the E amp M signaling interface with inverted polarity It is also applicable to the SPQ454 channel unit Menu Description Service Details Parameters Description TIMT This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0
22. 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms 6 2 8 Alarm Data Synchronization 6 2 9 AEM NB Alarm Log Handling 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms 6 3 Alarm Monitoring 6 3 1 General 6 3 2 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer 6 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions 6 3 3 1 Menu Bar 6 3 3 2 Toolbar 6 3 3 3 General Information Section 6 3 3 4 Alarm Table 6 3 3 4 1 Alarm Parameters 6 3 3 4 2 Sorting Alarms 6 3 4 System Management Functions 6 3 4 1 File 6 3 4 2 Views AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 O O O O N O amp O N O 00 O 00 O 00 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O l O as O NO O NN O D O O1 O O1 O N O 00 O 00 O Issue 2 00 09 99 6 I arr Contents 6 3 4 3 Filters 6 19 6 3 4 4 Help 6 21 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions 6 21 64 Test Management 6 23 6 4 1 Port Test 6 24 6 4 2 AP Card Test 6 26 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Scheduling 6 28 6 4 4 Built in Self Test 6 29 6 4 5 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side 6 29 6 5 Information Management and Maintenance 6 31 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States 6 31 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 6 31 6
23. AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 User Management Contents 4 1 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 4 2 4 2 1 Create User 4 2 4 2 2 Modify User 4 4 4 2 3 Delete User 4 6 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create Domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify Domains 4 11 4 3 3 Delete Domains 4 14 4 4 User Groups 4 17 4 4 1 Create User Groups 4 17 4 4 2 Modify User Groups 4 22 4 4 3 Delete User Groups 4 26 4 5 Controlled Objects 4 28 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects 4 28 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 4 I A SSS Contents AEM NB R1 5 4 II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management 4 1 Introduction This chapter describes the User Administration and Profiling application It al lows to m create modify delete users m assign unassign users to from user groups m create modify delete user groups m assign unassign user groups access to from applications tasks and do mains m create modify delete domains m assign unassign controlled objects to from domains gt NOTE All actions can only be done by the AEM NB administrator AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 4 1 User Management User 4 2 User 4 2 1 Create User Introduction This chapter describes the process to add a new user to the system Before add ing a new user to the system please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login The user must be created via OS m The AEM NB administrator should know the login ID of the user to be
24. Also the user can force protection switching NE R1 2 COMDAC simplex duplex and IO DS1 mw NE Timing Synchronization The AEM NB supports the user to configure the NE synchronization clock sources m NE Date and Time The AEM NB allows the user to set and retrieve the date and time of the NE m NE Disaster Recovery from the AEM NB The AEM NB is able to reconstruct its NE database by polling the NEs for information and from internally maintained backup copies of data Service The Service Management provides the following functionality features Management m NE Service Status Provides the aliveness status of the individual NEs providing a customer s service across all NEs under the EM s control m Logical DS1 List Logical DS1 ids can be listed based on a selection criteria m Change Voice Frequency Data Enhancement VFDE for TR 303 VRTs Enabling Disabling of the Voice Frequency Data Enhancement VFDE of a TR 303 Virtual Remote Terminal VRT m Datalink Protection Switching Provides datalink protection switching of a TR 303 Virtual Remote Terminal VRT for both TR 303 datalinks Embedded Operations Channel EOC and Timeslot Management Channel TMO m Edition of the Network Interface m Creation of a VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 Cross Connection AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 9 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee a Edition of a VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 of a VRT VB m Deleti
25. Default O Balance1 Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or BAL1 CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed Balance2 Mode This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 RTLP Receive This slider can be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in Transmission dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain Poe nou Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 TTLP Transmit This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or Transmission loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de Level Point fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 101 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning rr TE ee 5 4 7 5 Service Details GSFN BRI Overview The BRI basic rate interface transmission extension 3 DSO ISDN BRITE is ap plicable to the AUA293 ISDN BRITE channel unit which uses the U Interface 2B1Q signal comprising two B channels and one D channel plus overhead Service Details Parameters Description Switched VC Switched Virtual Connection for ISDN This option menu can be used to select the combination of
26. Removal of a NE If an NE is no longer be managed by the AEM NB the administrator deletes it from the AEM NB database gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM NB database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM NB and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM NB is not possible until the NE is created and connected again 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs Adding a NEs can be modified by adding or removing plug in units The AEM NB recogn Plug in Unit ises automatically which plug in unit has been plugged and where As only default settings are set on the new plug in unit the system administrator must adapt the configuration Removing a When deleting a plug in unit it must be ensured that there are no connections Plug in Unit running via this unit Then the plug in unit may be removed 1 4 3 3 Performance Monitoring Tasks of Performance management guarantees that the transmission quality does not fall Performance below a minimum performance threshold Another task is the recording of data for Monitoring analysis at a later date AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 25 Functional Description Working with AEM NB E SeSe 1 4 4 System Security and User Groups The AEM NB provides mechanisms which protect the system from unauthorised access The user groups play a very important role in this context as they define different levels of access rights for the individual users Pr
27. The GSFN parameters are dependent on the GSFN type and they are shown in each GSFN group table There are some services which do not have special details COIN ISDN AC DATA EBS LR and NO 1 2 Service State Shows the Logical TO service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values In Service IS Out of Service OOS AEM NB R1 5 5 96 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee Parameters Buttons Secondary Ser vice State Get Apply Description Shows the secondary service state information obtained from the NE It provides supplementary information about the line state This field capable of displaying two lines of text has a verti cal scroll bar to allow display of multiple lines Possible values Abnormal ANR Facility Failure FAF Family of Equipment Failure FEF Fault FLT Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes MEA Red Lined RDLD Supported Entity Exists SDEE Supported Entity Outage SGE Switch SWTCH Test TS Unassigned UAS Unequipped UEQ This button retrieves the Logical TO service states This button is used to accept the different changes The following descriptions of service details are introduced by a short explanation overview For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements docu mentation 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 97 Configuration Manag
28. To open a remote session with an ITM SNC the operator must provide the con nection information Login and Password as for the login into an ITM SNC ses sion for more information cf ITM SNC User Manual FiberReach GUI The AEM NB GUI behavior but not necessarily the performance is not affected independence by any simultaneous Fiber Reach connection running on the platform The operator using the AEM NB GUI does not need to know about any Fiber Reach sessions running on the AEM NB platform The performance of the system AEM NB R1 5 5 122 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Fiber Reach could be affected by the load of the hardware but the behavior of the GUI is the same in both cases 5 9 1 Start a Fiber Reach Session Complete the following procedure to start a Fiber Reach session 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 12 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter the host number where the ITM SNC is installed from the list of available hosts or enter a for include a new one cf Chapter 5 9 2 page 5 123 3 Enter the Login and Password defined on the ITM SNC documentation Now you are able to use the ITM SNC application 5 9 2 Add a Host Complete the following procedure to add a host for Fiber Reach
29. be used in the MDS2 MDS2B The FX O P 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign Xoffice no toll diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the SPQ444 channel unit which is intended for use in non locally switched loop and ground start special services Loop start normal simplex Loop start reverse simplex Ground start normal sim plex Ground start reverse simplex The FX S T 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign exchange no toll diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to be used in the MDS2 MDS2B Loop start nor mal simplex Loop start reverse simplex Ground start normal simplex Ground start reverse simplex Service Details Parameters Description TRMT This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 RCV This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Load Non Load This option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or non loaded distribution cable Possible values N L Default N Bandwidth This slider can be used to control the frequency response characteristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values
30. i Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 12 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter a that identifies the option Add Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be added gt NOTE The host is reachable by Fiber Reach if the user name and the IP address of the AEM NB user is contained in the rlogin file 3 Enter the name of the host where the ITM SNC is installed 4 Enter q and press Return io exit AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 123 Configuration Management Provisioning Fiber Reach BE SeSe 5 9 3 Delete a Host Complete the following procedure to delete a host for Fiber Reach 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 12 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter d that identifies the option Del Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be removed 3 Enter the number that identifies the host on the list 4 Select q and press Return to exit AEM NB R1 5 5 124 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Contents 6 1 Overview 6 2 Alarm Management 6 2 1 Overview 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information
31. lt Package_Version gt have been found Please use pkgrm lt Package_Version gt to delete previous version m When a package with the same architecture and name and different ver sion was installed partially previously AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 363 211 402 Previous partially installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found but with different version Package_Version than the new you want to in stall gt NOTE In cases 1 2 4 and 5 the installation will finish without changes on the sys tem m After this step the installation looks for its packages dependencies If a needed package is found the following message will appear Package lt Package_Name gt lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Verison gt have been found in lt Application_Path gt gt NOTE Refer to Type y and press Return on page 12 to see this trace If the package is not found the installation will prompt about its installation path in order to check this path and the correct application version lt Package_Name gt needs lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Version gt to be installed previ ously Answer q to next question and install the package lt Package_Name gt otherwise provide the paths required What is the base path of lt Required_Package_Name gt lt Package_verision gt
32. 02 m OrbixNamesi1 1c m OrbixWeb 3 0 m ObjectStore5 0 mw jre1 1 7 symantec ReportPro m LUMOS build 5 m RogueWave 1 5 7 amp 1 1 2 which were built using the Application Packaging tools offered by Solaris refer to your SUN documentation for more information AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 3 Software Installation and Commissioning General BE SeSe A package contains a collection of files and directories required for the application and scripts to control how where and if the package is installed Table 2 1 AEM NB R1 5 distribution description Package Name Application Name LUANY16S AnyMedia Servers LUANY16C AnyMedia Clients LUANY16en AnyMedia Help LuLUMRT Lumos build 5 RT LUOXNSRT OrbixNames 1 1c RT LUOX23RT OrbixMT 2 3c pacth02 RT LUuOSRT ObjectStore 5 0 RT LUuOXTKRT OrbixTalk 1 2c patchO2 RT LUOXWRT OrbixWeb 3 0 RT LuURWRT RogueWave 1 5 7 amp 1 1 2 RT LuJRERT jre 1 1 7 symantec ReportPro gt NOTE RT describes a Run Time application version Pre requisites In order to successfully install the AEM NB R1 5 Client side the application Netscape 4 5 shall be already installed on the target system TCP ports The following ports must be available in order to successfully run the AEM NB R1 5 m 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol m 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a p
33. 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nn Parameters Buttons Description Active Timing This field shows the current timing synchronization source Sync Source obtained from the NE by using the Get button Possible values Free Running Loop Timed PRI Loop Timed SEC External DS1 Ext1 External DS1 Ext 2 Ex ternal Clock Ext1 External Clock Ext 2 lf the Get button has not been pressed this field will be empty Get This button can be used to retrieve the Active Timing Syn chronization Source from the NE gt NOTE During the get operation the Apply and Switch but tons are disabled The timing reference subpane will also be updated as result of this operation Switch This button is enabled only if the Active Timing Synchroni zation Source is not Free Running lt can be used to switch between the working and standby sources of synchronization In other words the standby source becomes the working source and the working source becomes the standby source gt NOTE During the switch operation the Apply and Get but tons are disabled The Active Timing Synchroniza tion Source field will also be updated as result of this operation 3 Use the menu buttons to select appropriate values for Synchronization Mode Primary Source and Secondary Source 4 Press Switch to switch between the working and standby sources of syn chronization s Press Apply to con
34. 1 26 1 5 Network Configuration 1 27 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN 1 27 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN 1 28 1 5 3 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN 1 29 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 30 AEM NB R1 5 1 II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description 1 1 About this Subject Scope This chapter describes the Release 1 5 of the AnyMedia Element Manager for narrowband services AEM NB Purpose This chapter provides an overview of the AEM NB and tries to give an insight into the functioning of the AEM NB by providing detailed information on the AEM NB features mentioned Contents The following AEM NB subjects are described m Basic functionality m Management features m System and software architecture m Hardware and software platform m Interfaces m Applications 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 1 1 Functional Description Introduction ee 1 2 Introduction General The AEM NB is part of a Telecommunication Management Network TMN It rep resents the element management layer and fulfills the tasks of the ISO nterna tional Standardisations Organisation functional areas see Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 Benefits This provides some benefits for the operator m Better control over revenue generating services by local and centralized management m Reduced time and effort for provisioning t
35. 1 9 to Figure 1 12 gt NOTE If there are various configuration options of the DCN these are shown in the figures by means of dashed lines The hubs are optional depending on the number of client platforms and NEs 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN AEM NB server connected to the NEs using a Local Area Network LAN AEM NB server Hub TCP IP LAN P o o o o o o o Jo o o o o jo o o jo e o o je je o jo o e o o je o o jo o o NE FES fe ps ae p NE e e j Wi NE Figure 1 9 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 27 Functional Description Network Configuration 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN AEM NB server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a LAN Clien Clien Jo AEM NB Server TCP IP LAN Hub NE NE NE Figure 1 10 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN AEM NB R1 5 1 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Network Configuration a SeS 1 5 3 AEM NB S
36. 13 Restart Workspace Manager 3 13 Shuffle Up Down 3 13 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 IN 5 Index AEM NB R1 5 IN 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402
37. 2 09 99 6 21 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring i Ee Clear alarms The user can clear one more or all platform alarms If not all selected alarms could be cleared you are informed about the alarms for which this action failed m Print alarm lists cf Chapter 6 3 4 1 page 6 18 Prerequisites Before performing alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearance select the alarms you want to acknowledge or clear Starting Actions select the desired alarm viewer action If you want to Result Notes retrieve alarms Actions gt Reload Reloads alarms in the table Only alarms which match the filter criteria are included Same functionality as Reload in the tool bar To customize the displayed alarm list perform the ac tions described in Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 and Chapter 6 3 4 2 page 6 18 All selected alarm items are acknowledged Their sta tus immediately changes to acknowledge acknowledge alarms Actions gt Acknowledge Same functionality as Acknowledge in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 clear alarms Actions gt Clear All selected alarm items are cleared Their status im mediately changes to cleared Same functionality as Clear in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 AEM NB R1 5 6 22 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Main
38. 3 16 Help gt On Window 3 16 Metallic Distribution Shelf 5 3 Metallic Shelf Controller 2 2 5 4 Minimize Restore Front Panel workspace menu 3 13 Modifying network 1 24 network element 1 25 Mouse 3 6 MSD2 view 5 25 N NE Date amp Time 5 55 NE Details 5 17 NE id 5 17 NE AM Alarms 6 35 NEASSOC_LOST 6 38 o E Network life cycle 1 18 modifying 1 24 normal operation 1 21 physical installation 1 19 Network Browser 5 9 Network element modifying 1 25 registration 1 20 Network element management 3 18 Network planning 1 19 Normal Alarms 6 35 NVDS Data Backup 5 118 Data Restore 5 119 O Off line backup database 3 24 OK button 3 15 On line backup database 3 24 OPR LPBK 6 30 Option menu 3 15 Ordering Document XVI a SaS P PASS VIOLATION 6 39 Password 5 19 Performance monitoring 1 25 Periodical Alarm Deletion 6 9 Platform Alarm 6 35 Plug in unit adding 1 25 removing 1 25 Port Information Application Pack 5 36 Channel Unit 5 44 Port test 6 24 Port test result 6 25 Power Test Units 5 4 Print reports 3 21 Product safety Classification XV Programs workspace menu 3 13 protection forced switching 5 60 inhibit switching 5 60 manual switching 5 60 side switching 5 60 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 IN 3 Index Protection Switching COMDAC 5 62 lO DS1 5 65 Provisioning network 1 20 Pushbutton 3 14 Q Quitting the Alarm Viewer 6 11
39. 3 drop 1 1 2 DFLT inadsO 1 4 amp ina m2drop 1 1 1 BRI inadsO 1 7 m2drop 1 1 2 BRI v8dp 1 1 drop 1 1 1 2NOS Edit Logical TO Delete Close Figure 5 39 Logical TO List Window This window displays the Logical TO id list based on a selection criterion Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the pane Logical TO List see below m All Network Interfaces The list displays all Logical TOs currently present in the NE for all VRT VBs m TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases except TR 303 a non editable option list will be available showing the possible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids automatically sets the corresponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it Possible values v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 91 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee Parameters Buttons Description Add Logical This button is only available if a specific VRT VB id has been TO selected and the maximum number of Logical TOs has not yet been created max 96 for TR 08 max 2048 for TR 303 max 24 for INA Logical TO List The information in this field is displayed in a table VRT VB id Displays a logical part of the NE that sup ports a sing
40. 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Circuit Pack LED Meanings AP MDSU FLT Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack LNK yellow m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected See Chapter 6 2 page 6 1 for more details about alarm handling 5 3 2 1 2 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View Window This window provides general inventory provisioning and alarm information through the circuit pack LEDs Each slot will show the card type inserted and its alarms when applicable If the slot is empty no card will be shown NE Linares MDS2 View Figure 5 12 MDS2 Shelf View Window fa 954 4 RIHGIHS T3 T3 HE LT Aj Aj A u j Uj U Aj Aj A 4j dj rF 3 j 5 5 Aw oO Ww EE E FLT A uU A 1 5 o cuz Figure 5 13 MDS2B Shelf View Window AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 25 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 7 page 5 38 for MSC Chapter 5 3 2 1 8 page 5 40 for PTU Chapter 5 3 2 1 9 page 5 42 for CU Circuit Pack Meanings CU m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes during software download and turnup MSC red Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack CEAN m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes
41. 402 Issue2 09 99 A 11 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations ee AEM NB R1 5 A 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 o E Abbreviations A ACO Alarm Cut off ADSL Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line AEM AnyMedia Access System Element Manager AFM Access Feeder Multiplexer AID Access Identifier AMAS AnyMedia Access System ANR Abnormal ANSI American National Standards Institute AO Autonomous Output Message AP Application Pack APOG Applications Planning and Ordering Guide ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AUTO Automatic B BAL Balance BB Backus Naur Form AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 AB 1 Abbreviations ee SS BCL Bank Controller Link BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply BRA Basic Rate Access C CD Compact Disk CDE Common Desktop Environment CFL Customer Feature List CIT Craft Interface Terminal CIU Communication Interface Unit CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore CMIP Common Management Information Protoco CO Central Office CPE Customer Premises Equipment CR Critical alarm severity CRV Call Reference Value CTAG Correlation Tag CTRL Control CTU Craft Test Unit CU Channel Unit AEM NB R1 5 AB 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Abbreviations D DB Database DC Direct Current DCN Data Communication Ne
42. 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association 6 32 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after Association 6 33 6 5 5 Association Maintenance 6 34 6 6 Alarms 6 35 6 6 1 Overview 6 35 6 6 2 Alarm Types 6 35 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms 6 37 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms 6 37 6 6 4 1 LOG_DEL_FULL 6 37 6 6 4 2 LOG _DEL_PART 6 38 6 6 4 3 NEASSOC_LOST 6 38 6 6 4 4 PASS VIOLATION 6 39 6 6 4 5 SWVR_ILLEGAL 6 40 6 6 4 6 TCP IP_CON_REFUSED 6 40 6 6 4 7 TL1 _COMM_DENIED 6 41 AEM NB R1 5 6 II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance 6 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m Basics on the alarm management m Basics on alarms m Maintenance actions if certain alarms are pending m Using the Alarm Viewer m Performing test actions with the test management Basics on information management e g connection states 6 2 Alarm Management 6 2 1 Overview 363 211 402 The main function of the alarm management is to manage the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB and Network Ele ment NE related alarms that are registered in the Element Manager System EMS For the list of the NE alarms refer to Chapter 6 6 3 page 6 37 For the list of the alarms generated by the management system refer to Chapter 6 6 4 page 6 37 Once the communication connection between the AEM NB and an NE is estab lished the AEM NB clears the not connected
43. 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms General An alarm is raised by the NE or by any object of the AEM NB When an alarm is raised its state and the relevant transmitted data cf Chapter 6 6 2 page 6 35 are updated Special care has to be taken if the alarm is raised repeatedly see Repetitive and Fluc tuating Alarms In this case the already existing alarm is put into the raised state The user acknowledge identification if available is removed from the alarm This way a raised condition of an existing alarm is considered as a new raising not a new alarm The number of occurrences is increased every time the same alarm is raised Repetitive and A repetitive alarm is an alarm that is raised several times before it is cleared A fluctuating Fluctuating Alarms alarm is an alarm that is raised and cleared alternatively several times in a short period at least less than the AEM NB constant for the cleared alarms see Chapter 6 2 10 page 6 9 To handle these alarms three fields are defined and maintained for each alarm First Raised Time m Last Changed Time Number of Occurrences The alarm viewer can obtain the following information m The Number of Occurrences is the number of times the alarm has been raised between when it was first raised and the current time only the raised alarms are counted In this period the alarm has been raised all the time or it may have been raised cleared several times it is not relevant to dist
44. 6 4 3 Daily Incremental Weekly Cumulative Backups 3 30 3 7 Log Management 3 32 3 7 1 Different Log Types 3 32 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs 3 32 3 7 3 Log Viewer Window Toa 3 8 System Variables 3 38 AEM NB R1 5 3 II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management 3 1 Overview This chapter provides you with information about m Accessing the AnyMedia management system AEM NB m General handling of the workspace and AEM NB windows m Starting up and shutting down applications m Printing out reports from AEM NB windows m Backup and restore tasks m Basics on log management and how to use the Log Viewer AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 1 System Management System Access 3 2 System Access To access the AnyMedia Element Manager AEM NB application you need to have an account in the underlying operating system and this account has to be accepted as a user account of AEM NB AEM NB user accounts are managed by the administrator cf Chapter 4 3 2 1 Login to Operation System This chapter describes how to log into the system System Login Complete the following procedure to log in Step Procedure 1 The system asks for your user name Enter your user name and press Return or click OK 2 The system asks for your password Enter your password and press Return or click OK Login Correct If the login was correct the workspace is displayed Login Incorrect If the login was incorrect a warning messa
45. All gt NE gt Logical DS1 List Edit Logical DS1 List All gt NE gt Logical TO List Edit Logical TO List AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 13 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 Equipment Configuration Overview Configuration of Specific Equipment Data is the process of preparing the AEM NB for control of the AnyMedia Access System by configuring and setting any re quired option Prior to network interface configuration and service configuration the AEM NB must know some data of the equipment this is done during the NE creation pro cess which is usually followed by circuit pack configuration Then during NE management some other tasks regarding equipment configura tion can be performed by the AEM NB e g Date amp Time Management Timing Synchronization Management Protection Management etc Finally if the NE is not managed by the AEM NB any longer it shall be deleted from the AEM NB database The description of equipment configuration is divided in three main sections m Add Ne cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 m Edit view configuration data cf Chapter 5 3 2 page 5 21 m Delete NE cf Chapter 5 3 3 page 5 67 Figure 5 5 page 5 15 shows an overview of the screen navigation for equipment configuration In this figure is assumed that the NE is already connected cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 The boxes with a gray background show the Network Browser selection the
46. Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack IO_DSI m COMDAC COMDAC r N Figure 5 1 AnyMedia Shelf Layout Release 1 2 1 Even when the AnyMedia Access System AEM NB directly manages only the narrowband plug ins of the AnyMedia Access System the broadband packs will also be displayed to provide the required integration level between both managers AEM NB R1 5 5 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview ae N S 5 1 1 1 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf Layout The use of the MDS2 or MDS2B Shelf is optional If it is used one or two AnyMe dia Access System AP slots are equipped with the MDSUs server units each of which connects to an MSC Metallic Shelf Controller pack in the MDS2 Shelf The MDS2 MDS2B Shelf based on the SLC 2000 Metallic Distribution Shelf MDS has the capacity to hold 24 SLC SPQ or AUA channel units and to serve up to 96 DSO rate services The MDS2 MDS2B Shelf is used to provide specials via SPQ AUA Channel Units A maximum of one MDS2 MDS2B Shelf is supported per AnyMedia Access Sys tem The shelf can serve up to 96 DSOs in 24 slots each MDSU pack on the Any Media Access System shelf can serve up to 48 DSOs and up to 12 channel units CU The MDSU APs primarily serve as pass through for the PCM transmission and the UART messages All control messages to and from the MDS2 MDS2B Shelf are routed through the MDSU packs
47. Area Network WAN Examples are shown in Figure 1 9 to Figure 1 12 Tasks of the The tasks of the components are re penen AEM NB Server Manages all the AEM NB applications and provides access to the NEs the database and the external OS AEM NB Client Formats the display of the application screens and manages the users ses sions with the application e g database access Conceptional Figure 1 4 is a conceptual representation of the various generic components Representation GUI AEM NB Client AEM NB Server Database z AEM NB Client AEM NB System Figure 1 4 Hardware Components AEM NB R1 5 1 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture Examples of Two examples of an AEM NB system are shown in Figure 1 5 AEM NBs AEM NB System 1 AEM NB System 2 Clien Client Client AEM NB Server Hub OO E L ooN AEM NB Server Figure 1 5 Examples of AEM NBs 1 3 2 2 Requirements Server Clients A SUN SOLARIS workstation can be used as AEM NB Server as well as AEM NB Client Peripherals The AEM NB system may use a number of peripherals with the following tasks m CD ROM Used for installing the system software Tape drive or another removable device optional Used for backup and restore functions m Printer Used for obtaining hard copies e g configuration alarm reports or perfor mance monitor
48. CLEI Qperation amp Protection Slot Required Close Figure 5 18 MSC Window AEM NB R1 5 5 38 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Te Equipment Configuration The following table shows the view edit options of the MSC window Parameters Buttons NE Name Slot Inventory Infor mation Operation amp Protection Description NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot number where the MSC is plugged in Possible values msc 1 1 2 The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values MSC Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value MSC100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the
49. Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee The AnyMedia Access System supports the following protection features m COMDAC pack 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf following section m IO _DS1 packs 1 N protection 1 lt N lt 5 revertive switch cf Chapter 5 3 2 7 2 page 5 63 m Synchronization reference source 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 3 2 4 page 5 52 m EOC TMC data links 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 73 Definitions The different kinds of switching COMDACs and IO_DS1 circuit packs are de fined as follows m Side Switching refers to the operation of deactivating the active core en tity and activating the standby core entity Manual normal Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit is in ser vice and there are no known faults Forced Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that in structs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the pro tection unit a Inhibit Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that in structs the NE to inhibit a side switch no matter what the conditions of the active unit are 5 3 2 7 1 COMDAC Protection Switching Overview The COMDAC is the core circuit pack of the AnyMedia Access System The NE supports both duplex and simplex operations i e the COMDAC can
50. Displays the number of minor MN alarms m Information Displays the number of information IN alarms m Total Displays the total number of alarms all severities Additionally the frame contains two option menus which show the filter cf Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 and view cf Chapter 6 3 4 2 page 6 18 currently being used In this two option menus the user can select filters and views AEM NB R1 5 6 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring General Information Critical 11 View View 1 Figure 6 5 6 3 3 4 Alarm Table Major 23 Frame General Information Minor 16 Information 0 Total 50 Filter Alarms for the last 24 hours The last section in the Alarm Viewer window Is a table that contains zero or more alarms belonging to a domain This table allows the user to sort the alarms cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 by clicking on a specific table header The user also can select them for acknowledgment or clearance The mechanism to acknowl edge or clear is the same the user has to select one or more alarms After select ing the alarms click on Acknowledge or Clear in the tool bar or select Actions gt Acknowledge or Actions gt Clear via the menu bar 4larm_Type Object_ld Severity Status Date amp Time_Last 14 NE_ASSOC_LO NES ASSOC Cleared 26 1 1999 10 47 AM 28 LOG_DEL_FU
51. Management The NE Management functionality is distributed in 5 areas These are Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Performance Manage ment and Test Management Equipment The Equipment Management provides the following functionality features a Solent m Scrolling List of NEs The NEs are displayed in a list covered in a single window called Network Browser where the NEs and their components can be handled like files in a file browser m NE Provisioning The operator can create a new NE manageable for the AEM NB view The operator must enter the specific configuration data for the new NE such as IP address NE Name NE user id and password m Software Download to a single NE Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the software and a mechanism for downloading that software to a NE m Software Download to multiple NEs Download of new software to multiple NEs on an individual connection ba Sis m NEWNon Volatile Data Storage Restoration Restores NE non volatile data storage upon user request Provides a stor age medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes on a periodic basis m Maintain a local Copy of NE Inventory The AEM NB maintains a local copy of specific hardware identifiers and software version identifiers This local copy accepts automatic inventory notifications This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communica
52. NB Furthermore the user is automatically deleted from the user groups it was included in Before deleting any user assigned to the administrator user group the AEM NB checks that this is not the last user assigned to the administrator user group If this is the last one assigned the deletion is rejected AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 User Management User ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user from the AEM NB Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 7 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up showing the Users Table User Administration File Wiew User Name Description vert Default EM Administrator New Open Delete Figure 4 8 Users Table 3 Select the user which shall be deleted in the Login Name field and click Delete 4 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 7 User Management Domains 4 3 Domains 4 3 1 Create Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new domain Before creating a new domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login The controlled objects are defined as sets of managed NEs m Only EM and NE controlled object types are supported NOTE An EM object is generated by default with Type EM and
53. SW56 BRI The GSFNs are described in Chapter 5 4 7 1 page 5 98 to Chapter 5 4 7 15 page 5 110 gt NOTE When coming from the Application Pack window Add Logical TO cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 34 or the VRT VB window Add Logical TO cf Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 73 this field is empty and edit able gt NOTE GSFN type is NOT modifiable in R1 5 A change in the GSFN of a Logical TO implies deletion and new cre ation of a Logical TO Depending on the GSFN se lected the list of parameters needed for configuring a subscriber will differ see the next sections Logical TO id s These fields show the Logical TO id s v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 v3dp 1 1 2048 for TR 303 inads0 1 20 1 24 for INA There are three fields available The second field will be available only when the GSFN field is populated with BRI NO1 NO2 or OCU1 OCU2 OCU for a second entry in bundle Logical TO The third field will be available only when the GSFN field is populated with BRI for a third entry in bundle Logical TO gt NOTE These fields are populated and non editable only when coming from Edit Logical TO Otherwise they are empty and editable gt NOTE For NO1 NO2 OCU1 OCU2 and OCU3 a second entry is possible but not allowed because this is not yet supported by the NE AEM NB R1 5 5 94 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning nn Parameters Bu
54. SeSe 5 4 8 Edit VRT VB Logical T0 Subscriber There are several ways to start the edit procedure The following figure shows the possibilities for opening the corresponding windows Access via the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP gt User Port Logical T0 and cursor menu Edit is also possible AP window Edit Logical TO CU window Edit Logical TO VRT VB window Edit Logical TO List Logical TO List window Edit Logical TO Logical TO window Figure 5 41 Edit Logical TO The edit options are described in Chapter 5 4 7 page 5 90 5 4 9 Delete VRT VB Logical T0 Sub scriber There are several ways to initiate the deletion of Logical TOs The corresponding button Delete Logical TO exists in the CU AP and Logical TO List windows this button is disabled in CU and AP windows for R1 5 Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a Logical TO A Select the Logical TO in the corresponding list 2 Click on Delete Logical TO button A Warning window pops up Logical TO will be deleted OK to proceed gt NOTE If the chosen Logical TO has been configured as red lined cf Figure 5 40 page 5 93 the following Warning message will pop up Redlined Logical TO will be deleted OK to proceed If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE AEM NB R1 5 5 112 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning NE
55. Software Upgrade 5 5 NE Software Upgrade This function is subdivided into two parts NE software download and program COpy 5 5 1 NE Software Download Overview There are two software versions the one in the active COMDAC and the new one to be downloaded It is assumed that the user has a copy of the software currently running in the active COMDAC The software download procedure is as follows m Start download Load software into the standby COMDAC Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is already connected and the NE hardware platform is prepared to receive and work with the new program version Procedure Complete the following procedure to start software download Step Procedure 1 Select All in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE SW Download via the Menu bar The NE SW Download window pops up AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 113 Configuration Management Provisioning NE Software Upgrade 5 114 Issue 2 Target nes nes mf Standby Comdac Automatic Copy Download Information Filename Figure 5 42 NESW Download Window This window is subdivided into two fields Target and Download Information 3 4 Select one or more NEs in the Target list Set the check box Standby Comdac Automatic Copy if you want to copy automatically the software from the working COMDAC to the standby COMDAC after the software download is completed success
56. Timing Refer Displays whether or not the selected physical DS1 is the tim ence ing source reference Yes or No The reference can be changed via the Edit button on the right hand side This button provides access to the NE Information window tab Timing Source Control cf Chapter 5 3 2 4 page 5 52 to allow the modification of the current NE timing source refer ence Get Via this button the physical DS1 Service State and the DS1 Secondary Service State can be displayed Possible values for Service State IS In Service or OOS Out of Service Possible values for Secondary Service State AUTO Auto matic Non Alarmed LPBK Loop back MON Degraded Signal or YEL Yellow Alarm Apply This button will only be available if the Equalization and or Degrade Threshold have been modified 10 Enter the appropriate cable length to the DSX 1 in the Equalization field 11 Select the Degrade Threshold for Physical Feeder 12 Click on Apply to confirm AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 87 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 4 Change Voice Frequency Data En hancement VFDE for TR 303 VRIs Assumption For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected and the VFDE state is well known Procedure Complete the following procedure to change VFDE for TR 303 VRTs Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VB List gt VRT Type TR 303 in the Network Browser
57. USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent i W W Enter selection q DO Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed AEM NB R1 5 2 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuJRERT gt y n 56 Type y and press Return Installing JRE 1 1 7 for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 as lt LUJRERT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt jre gt lt files list gt verifying class lt symantec gt lt files list gt verifying class lt report gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuJRERT 1log Installation of lt LUJRERT gt was successful OrbixWeb 3 0 In Processing package instance lt LUOXWRT gt from stallation lt tmp lucent_pkg 2 gt OrbixWeb 3 0 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris Version 3 0 Run Time Installing Version 3 0
58. View View 1 Filter Alarms for the last 24 hours Index Alarm_Type Object_Id Severity Status Date amp Time_Last 39 TCP_IP_CON_ ne3 ASSOC Cleared 23 2 1999 10 17 M 40 TL1_COMM_D nes Cleared 23 2 1999 9 24 AM Figure 6 3 Alarm Viewer Window 6 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be terminated as follows m By selecting File gt Exit in the Alarm Viewer menu to close all Alarm Viewers launched by the user m By clicking on Close button to close only the Alarm Viewer being in use Before quitting the Alarm Viewer the user is prompted for confirmation 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions The Alarm Viewer provides different possibilities to perform internal functions and alarm management functions These functions can be initiated via m Menu Toolbar In most cases the choice depends on the user s personal preference AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 11 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring 6 3 3 1 Menu Bar The menu is used to activate alarm viewer functions gt NOTE The executable functions depend on your user privileges Alarm Viewer File View Filter Actions Help Figure 6 4 Menu Bar of the Alarm Viewer Selection is achieved m By opening the menu by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor to the desired option in the menu or m By opening the menu via the keyboard by entering Alt plus the unde
59. a DCN is also needed PPP is being imple mented on top of the CIT port as to allow this remote management The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 TL1 over Telnet Sosa File Transfer Protocol TL1 over raw TCP also Supported TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 RS232 RS232 Figure A 1 AnyMedia Remote Access to CIT Port Protocol Profiles m External system LAN interface LAN interface is available via a backplane connector on the AnyMedia Ac cess System shelf It provides access to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface occur over the transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP to the GSI NB or element manager AEM NB The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 2 For AnyMedia NE release 1 7 it will be an IAO LAN also supporting an OSI protocol stack l TL1 over Telnet session File Transfer Protocol TL1 over raw TCP also supported TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 Figure A 2 AnyMedia External LAN Interface Profiles AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 A 3 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration NE Communication Capabilities o Ennn m Remote Operations Channel ROC The remote operations channel ROC is a 64 kbps timeslot within the
60. a built in self test of plug in circuit packs periodically m Loopback Test at the Feeder Side lt is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders 1 3 1 2 General Components The components of this group do not have or require any knowledge of the NEs the AEM NB is managing They provide a platform on which the other AEM NB components can operate and isolate them from the underlying customer platform OAM Components The OAM components provide operation administration maintenance and secu rity functionality This is based on third party tools i e orbix and a set of specific applications The OAM components provide the following functionality features 1 Operation Administration Maintenance m Standard Reports The system allows the user to generate a set of predefined reports from the information kept by the AEM NB The reports cover the following areas Alarms Equipment configuration Service provisioning NE inventory Performance The reports are available for displaying printing and saving in a postscript file AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 11 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee m Backup and Restore of system relevant data Relevant data includes all information necessary to restore the situation in case of an AEM NB crash m AEM NB Software Upgrades Provides an established release cycle for AEM NB software upgrades in a way that minimizes in
61. alarm lists you can select from four pre defined views m View Index Alarm Type Host Object Id Severity Status Date amp Time Last Change m View2 Index Alarm Type Host Object Id Status Date amp Time First_Raise Date amp Time Last_Change User Ack Occurrences m Views Index Summary Host Object ID Severity Status Date amp Time Last_Change m View4 All alarm fields Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected criteria AEM NB R1 5 6 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring TTT ee Selecting Views Proceed as follows to select the desired view option Step Procedure 1 Select Views gt ViewX X 1 to 4 in the menu bar The same view options can be selected via the option menu Views in the General Information section cf Chapter 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 Response The alarms are displayed according to the selected view 6 3 4 3 Filters Summary For displaying the alarm lists you can select pre defined filters Only those alarms corresponding to the pre defined criteria are displayed The alarm set is displayed without modifying the current view The filters are m Alarms for the last 24 hours all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours m 8 Critical Raised Alarms m Raised Alarms m Alarms from a Host s m Critical Alarms not cleared m Owned Acknowledge Alarms m Clear Alarms m All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter
62. also supports one TAP Test Access Path The PTU2 TAP TAP A is required for special services testing and local test access the PTU1 TAP TAP B is required for POTS testing Channel Units CU SLC carrier SPQ and AUA type channel units will be used All intelligence about the CUs their register formats and locations the PTU message sets etc reside on the COMDAC The set of SLC channel units supported is shown below AEM NB R1 5 5 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview eee eee ee m AUA293 BRITE IlI m SPQ429 Quad P phone CF m SPQ442 Quad E SPOTS CS m AUA41B 4W CF inventory ready m AUA45B Ringing repeater manual ringdown m AUA75 PLAR mw SPQ452 Dual Dataport OCU AUA200 SW 56 2W CU Adtran m AUA232 RS 232 Adtran m SPQ444 Single 4W CS w TDM m SPQ454 Single 4W E amp M Types amp II m MCU 5205 DC alarm CU Tollgrade m MCU 5405 DC bypass CU Tollgrade 5 1 1 2 Virtual Remote Terminals The AnyMedia Access System can be configured to be logically divided into a number of separate virtual terminals that provide three types of voice frequency service node interfaces TR3803 TRO8 and INA 5 1 1 3 OAM amp GP Interfaces There are three operations administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P interfaces to the AnyMedia Access System shelf for telephony applica tions m Local EIA 232D serial port on the CTU DTP100 in the AnyMedia Access System shelf to whic
63. be carried out and documented Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system in cluding the software must be carried out by qualified Lucent Tech nologies personnel or by expert personnel authorized by Lucent Technologies All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability No components spare parts must be used other than those recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents The unit system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by the user to a person in responsibility The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be cor rectly connected to the protective earth Never connect to 60 V The unit system must be operated only with the connections and un der the environmental conditions as described in the documentation The removal or disabling of safety facilities the clearing of faults and errors and the maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualified personnel only The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measur ing and test equipment Transport storage and operation of the unit system must be under the permissible conditions only See accom
64. be protected or unprotected In duplex operation the COMDAC will run in an active and standby mode The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Re quired and the AEM NB is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is re moved When a COMDAC is removed the AEM NB is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex AEM NB R1 5 5 60 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for the COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser and Protection via the cursor menu or select Equipment gt Protection via the Menu bar The Shelf Protection window pops up tab COMDAC shelfProtection Figure 5 26 Shelf Protection Window Tab COMDAC for IO DS1 description see Chapter 5 3 2 7 2 page 5 63 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 61 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee This window provides COMDAC protection information It also provides the mech anisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches Parameters Buttons Description Protection Represents the protection scheme used in the NE If only Scheme one COMDAC is present in the shelf th
65. button Activate the maximize button by clicking on it to show the window at its maximum size i e the window will occupy the whole screen If you click again on the maximize button thus activated the window will be restored to its original size Menu bar The menu bar contains the menu names each of them containing options related to the topic These options may be selected to control the process running in this win dow cf Chapter 3 3 6 Window menu Click this button to open the window menu cf Figure 3 5 Double click to exit the ap button plication AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 9 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows a SeSe 3 3 5 Window Menu A window can be provided with a window menu The window menu allows to alter the appearance of the window or to exit the application represented by the win dow Restore Alt F5 Move Alt F7 Size Alt F8 Minimize Alt F9 Maximize Alt F10 Lower Alt F3 Close Alt F4 Figure 3 5 Window Menu To open the window menu shown in Figure 3 5 click on the window menu button or click with the right mouse button on the window frame The menu options in the window menu are listed in the following table Table 3 3 Window Menu Items and their Function Menu Item Function Restore A window currently being represented as an icon or in its maxi mum size is restored to its original size Move Allows you to move the window interactively on
66. characters to be cross con nected in field Physical DS1 3 Enter the appropriate Logical DS1 id up to 10 characters to be cross connected 4 Click on label button Add Logical DS1 5 Switch to tab Logical DS1 Data AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 83 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Physical DS1 Logical DS1 NE Name nes YVRT VB ID ina 1 Gross Gonnection Physical DSi Data Logical DS1 Data Logical DS1 Data Logical DS1 ID ina 1 ESF Frame Format B8ZS Line Code Service State Sec Service State Figure 5 36 Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Window Tab Logical DS1 Data Logical DS1 information will be provided only if there is a Physical DS1 Logical DS1 cross connection in place Parameters Buttons Description Logical DS1 id This field shows the corresponding value any number be tween 1 and 28 Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA gt NOTE Only 20 logical DS1s can be cross connected inside an NE AEM NB R1 5 5 84 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Frame Format Line Code Get Apply Description This option menu shows the possible frame formats Three possible values ESF Extended SuperFrame FS SuperFrame with Datalink or SF SuperFrame Default values are m ESF for TR 30
67. cre ated and the group the user shall belong to Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a new user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 1 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up showing the Users Table AEM NB R1 5 4 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User User Administration Default EM Administrator Figure 4 2 Users Table 3 Click New The User Profile window pops up User Profile Pe oe ok fly lose Figure 4 3 Window User Profile AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 3 User Management User ee 4 Enter a new login name in the Login Name field this is mandatory 3 to 12 characters and extra information like last name first name email etc in the User Name Description field this is optional O to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 5 Select one or more user groups the user shall belong to in the User Groups Not Assigned field and Click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 17 6 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 2 2 page 4 4 4 2 2 Modify User
68. email etc enter the new information in the User Name Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign the selected user to further user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 17 To remove the selected user from user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply The following fields are read only fields to display user data Login Name Displays the label which identifies the user User Status Displays if the system login associated to this user is created enabled or deleted disabled Number of sessions opened Displays the number of sessions opened into the AEM NB by the user 4 2 3 Delete User Introduction 4 6 Issue2 09 99 This chapter describes the process to remove a user from the AEM NB Before re moving a user please pay attention to the following remarks m To remove a user from the AEM NB the administrator must have a system login m When a user is deleted all related information and profiles are removed from the system This does not include the system login and any other sys tem resources such as home directories or system files which are not man aged by the AEM
69. files list gt Executing postremove script Updating system information Removal of lt LuANY16C gt was successful You have now removed the AnyMedia Client package AEM NB R1 5 2 42 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure oo Ennn 2 2 4 3 Remove Third Party packages The following procedure is the same for all parts of the Third Party software For example the procedure below describes the removal of the RogueWave package Complete the following procedure to remove the RogueWave package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Type pkgrm LuRWRT and press Return The following package is currently installed LURWRT RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 sparc 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 Do you want to remove this package 3 Type y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuRWRT gt Verifying package dependencies Processing package information Removing pathnames in class lt none gt lt file list gt Updating system information Removal of lt LuRWRT gt was successful You have now removed the RogueWave package AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 43 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters 2 3 Configuration Parameters 2 3 1 Introduction This chapter provides information about all the configuration parameters that are used with AEM NB R1 5 as follows m A
70. following fields are read only fields to display data of the selected controlled read only object Controlled Object Type Displays the controlled object type Possible values are EM and NE Value Displays the characteristics of the selected controlled object e g NE name AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 31 User Management Controlled Objects ee AEM NB R1 5 4 32 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Contents 5 1 Overview 5 1 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R1 5 5 1 5 1 1 1 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf Layout 5 3 5 1 1 2 Virtual Remote Terminals To 5 1 1 3 OAM8 amp P Interfaces Da 5 1 1 4 External Interfaces for Circuit Testing 5 6 5 1 1 5 Synchronization Interfaces 5 6 5 1 1 6 Plug amp Play Capabilities 5 6 5 1 1 7 NE Equipment Configuration Related Tasks 5 6 5 2 Configuration Manager Window 5 8 5 2 1 Network Browser 5 9 5 2 2 Menu Bar 5 9 5 2 3 Status Bar 5 11 5 2 4 Cursor Menu 5 12 5 2 4 1 Structure and Cursor Menus 5 12 5 3 Equipment Configuration 5 14 5 3 1 Add an NE 5 16 5 3 2 Edit View of Configuration Data 5 21 5 3 2 1 NE View 5 21 5 3 2 1 1 Shelf View Window 5 23 5 3 2 1 2 MDS2 MDS82B Shelf View Window 5 25 5 3 2 1 3 Configure lO DS1 5 27 5 3 2 1 4 Configure COMDAC 5 30 5 3 2 1 5 Configure CTU 5 32 5 3 2 1 6 Configure Application Pack 5 34 5 3 2 1 7 Configure MSC 9 38 5 3 2 1 8 Configure PTU 5 40 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 I o
71. g windows applications and or SUN applications m Telecommunication Network knowledge AEM NB R1 5 X Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 About this Document How to use this document 3 How to use this document 363 211 402 The guide is divided into a number of sections Subjects clearly separated by numbered tabs The front pages of the guide also describe this division and list the titles of the subjects together with the corresponding tab numbers Through this readers can quickly select the subject of their interests and needs How are we doing A comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document Table of contents list of figures list of tables Overview Defines the purpose of the document and the intended audience Also in cluded are topics about the conventions used in the document related doc umentation how to order documents and how to comment on this docu ment Chapter 1 Functional Description Contains a short overview over the system its features and capabilities Chapter 2 Software Installation Describes the standard procedure to install the AEM NB R1 0 server pack age server applications and client package client applications Chapter 3 System Management Provides the system administrator with all information necessary to admin ister the AEM NB so that it can be used as a centralized management sys tem Chapter 4 User Management Describes all actions
72. gt Installing part 1 of 1 verifying class lt names gt lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script Okay OrbixNames is now installed You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXNS 1log Installation of lt LUuOXNS gt was successful OrbixTalk 1 2 c Processing package instance lt LuOXTKRT gt from patch02 Installation lt tmp lucent_pkg 5 gt OrbixTalk 1 2c02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris 1 2c02 OrbixTalk Installation details Version 1 2c02 Platform Solaris 2 x AEM NB R1 5 2 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Compiler WorkShop Compilers 4 2 30 Oct 1996 C 4 2 To install OrbixTalk1 2c you must already have Orbix2 3c installed If this is not the case please exit now If you already have OrbixTalk on your system this installation may overwrite some of the files Make sure you have a backup of your old OrbixTalk or install this new version in a new set of directories If you want to make a backup copy of the old version you should exit now It is recommended that you read the installa tion guide before you continue Do you want to continue y 20 Type y and press Return OK No previous package LuOXTKRT have been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt
73. gt Clear Text editing field View gt Expand Branch sign on the left Any View gt Collapse Branch sign on the left Any View gt Reload Window Equipment gt Provisioning gt Create gt NE All Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit View NE Shelf Slot DS1 Feeder Port User Port Physical DS1 Equipment gt Provisioning gt Delete NE Equipment gt Provisioning gt Time Source NE Control Equipment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time NE Equipment gt NE Inventory Data NE Equipment gt EM NE Synchronization NE Equipment gt NE Reset INIT SYS NE Equipment gt NE SW Download All Equipment gt NE NVDS Backup NE Equipment gt NE NVDS Restore NE Equipment gt Shelf View Shelf MDS2 Shelf MDS2Shelf Equipment gt Protection Shelf Equipment gt Program Copy Shelf Equipment gt Loopback Physical DS1 Service gt Provisioning gt Add gt Logical DS1 VRT VB id Service gt Provisioning gt Add gt Logical TO VRT VB id User Port Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View Network Interfaces List Logical DS1 List Logical TO List Service gt VRT VBs List NE Service gt Logical DS1 List NE Service gt Logical TO List NE Alarms gt Alarm Viewer NE cf Chapter 6 3 page 6 10 AEM NB R1 5 5 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window Menu entries Available at level Test Manager gt Physical
74. handling In the following the indi Handling vidual phases are described in more detail AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 21 Functional Description Working with AEM NB ee Fault localisation and diagnosis e Identification of the alarm source Identification of the fault source Fault identification e Detection of faults e Alarm display on the user interface Alarm logs Fault clearance e Recovery mechanisms e Interactions between operator and AEM NB e Initiation of maintenance actions el Cal Col Figure 1 8 General Fault Handling 1 4 3 1 1 Fault Identification Background AEM NB gathers information about faults occurring in the network and forwards this information to the network operator This procedure includes two tasks on the one hand the fault must be identified and on the other hand the fault information must be processed as alarm notifications to be displayed on the user interface Detection of Faults If a NE fault is detected the NE notifies the AEM NB The notification comprises the type of fault and the address of the originating NE The AEM NB detects and processes such a notification automatically AEM NB R1 5 1 22 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Working with AEM NB If the unit of a NE fails that is responsible for the communication with the AEM NB the fault is identified differently No alarm notification will be sent to the AEM NB The AEM NB detects the fault b
75. icon displays a flag and a counter The flag is raised if new alarms are received The counter is increased every time an alarm is received By default only critical alarms affect the Alarm Notification icon The counting starts with 0 every time the Access Bar is started The behavior of the Alarm Notifica tion icon can be changed so that it displays alarms with other severities AEM NB R1 5 3 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management System Access _ hi Te Reset Counter If you click on the Alarm Notification icon the flag is lowered and the counter re set Customize Alarm The behavior of the Alarm Notification Icon can be customized It reports only Notification alarms for which the corresponding variable see Table 3 1 in the system prefer ences file SANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini is set to true If the variable is set to false it reports no alarms of this alarm severity Table 3 1 Variables for Customizing Visual Alarm Notifications Alarm Severity Variable Name Critical VISUAL_CRITICAL_ALARM_SEV Major VISUAL_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV Minor VISUAL_MINOR_ALARM_SEV Info VISUAL_INFO_ALARM_SEV Audible Alarm No If an alarm of a certain alarm severity default critical is received an audible sig tification nal is issued The audible signal is generated only for alarms with an alarm sever ity for which the corresponding variable see Table 3 2 in the system preferences file is set to true If it is set to fa
76. if the VFDE status has been modified AEM NB R1 5 5 76 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning nn Parameters Buttons Description Datalinks amp Pro Primary Link Secondary Link Displays the Logical DS1 id tection not yet of the Primary logical feeder DS1 1 and Secondary Link available for logical feeder DS1 2 Only available if Logical DS1 id is R1 5 present Possible values are v3tdr 1 1 28 The Edit Logical DS1 button provides access to the DS1 Logical DS1 window Physical DS1 Data tab cf Figure 5 37 page 5 86 to change the timing reference EOC Datalink m Working Standby EOC Displays the Logical DS1 id used by the working standby EOC Embedded Opera tions Channel Possible values are v3fdr 1 1 28 m Manual Switch button Performs a manual switch be tween working and standby EOCs Only available if both working and standby EOCs are present and the standby path is not out of service Forced Switch button Performs a forced switch be tween working and standby EOCs Only available if both working and standby EOCs are present and re gardless of the service condition of the standby path TMC Datalink m Working Standby TMC Displays the Logical DS1 id used by the working standby TMC Timeslot Manage ment Channel Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 Manual Switch button Performs a manual switch be tween working and standb
77. is to provide the provisioning personnel with all informa tion necessary to provision an AnyMedia Access System R1 5 via the AEM NB The USM is a network oriented manual and will be shipped to all sites where an AEM NB is available It provides the provisioning operator s with necessary infor mation to configure or re configure network elements after local installation The philosophy behind the provisioning of network elements within a network is that the network is already installed configured and service has been provided to the network after first installation and that re configuration of the NE is necessary Provisioning takes place from the AEM NB located in one or more central offices AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 IX About this Document Intended Audience 2 Intended Audience The USM is intended for personnel who take care of deploying NEs by carrying out all provisioning activities of the NEs using the AEM NB Tasks to be performed by the Provisioning personnel are m Collect information of provisioning data e g check shelf layout units list Put ports in service and out service Assign timeslots Cross Connections Download and upload the provisioning data to and from the NEs m Testing of assigned ports m Recognize interpret analyze or correct failures caused by provisioning data that is configured incorrectly The personnel should at least have the following education level Computer knowledge e
78. level 0 means a full backup 3 6 4 1 Daily Cumulative Weekly Cumulative Backups This is the most commonly used backup schedule It is recommended for most sit uations Schedule Charac This schedule has the following characteristics Hears m Each weekday backup accumulates all files changed since the end of the previous week or the initial level 0 backup m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed since the first level 0 backup For the level 9 backups the previous level 0 or level 5 is the closest backup at a lower level m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed during the month to that point Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 15 Backup Levels of Each Backup The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 16 Example for Files in Backup for Two Weeks 1st week abcd abcdef AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 29 System Management Backup and Restore ee 3 6 4 2 Daily Cumulative Weekly Incremen tal Backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 17 Backup Levels of Each Backup The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 18 Example for Files in Backup for Two Weeks La 1st week abcdef 2nd week
79. lt OrbixTalk path gt dat where the package files must be placed and press Return press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP W 1 anymedia lucent W W Enter selection q 25 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXTKRT gt y n AEM NB R1 5 2 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Le 26 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixTalk 1 2c02 Runtime for AnyMe dia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOXTKRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt lt files list gt verifying class lt raw gt Executing postinstall script Making backing copy of the orbix configura tion file lt OrbixMT path gt cfg Orbix cfg to lt Or bixMT path gt cfg Orbix cfg old Licence regist
80. mous messages into equivalent CORBA requests and events TL1 Southbound The TL1 Southbound Adaptors isolate the main AEM NB functionality from the Adaptors specific protocols used by the NEs They are responsible for translating actions and state changes conveyed through CORBA messages from into the NE specific message formats Functionality The Southbound Interface provides the following functionality features Features Southbound TCP IP TL1 Client Application Support for the TL1 client application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces TL1 is used for most of the OAM amp P functions see Chapter 1 3 1 2 page 1 11 Southbound TCP IP FTP Client Applications Support for the FTP client application on the southbound TCP IP inter faces FTP is required for software download and NE data backup restore AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 15 Functional Description System and Software Architecture Le m Southbound TCP IP Telnet Client Applications Cut Through Support for the Telnet application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces Telnet is used to provide a direct command line into the NE i e an equiva lent ASCII terminal interface 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture Components A number of AEM NB Clients UNIX Workstations can be added to the AEM NB Server to Support concurrent users or remote access to the server s applications These clients can be connected through a TCP IP infrastructure or a Wide
81. of the week 0 6 with 0 Sunday q 44 Type a valid entry Do you like install the Backup process as a cron y n q 45 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 38 41 Do you like install the Archive process as a cron y n q 46 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 38 41 Clean up tasks for the AnyMediaNB EM system will be executed every day at 4 00 AM Do you like change it y n q k 47 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 38 41 Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 23 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Ee Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuANY16S gt y n 48 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager
82. or in the product environment is definite or likely IMPORTANT Material damage to the product or in the product environment is possible NOTICE A fault i e considerable impairment to operation will be caused or may be caused 7 Related Documentation Document List The following is related documentation for the AEM NB and for additional compo nents Table 1 List of Documents CIC Ordering Component Manual Type Comcode Number AEM NB R1 5 Functional Description 108588740 363 211 4012 AnyMedia Access System Applications Planning and 363 211 1012 Ordering Guide APOG AnyMedia Access System Installation Manual IM 363 211 1024 AnyMedia Access System Commands and Procedures 363 211 100 a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to Order This Document AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 XV About this Document How to Order This Document B SS 7 1 Print Copy Hard Copy Document All listed documents are available in print Packaging and Format 7 2 CD ROM The User Service Manual and the Functional Description are available in PDF for mat on CD ROM and an Adobe Acrobat Reader is provided to view them Table 2 Customer Documentation on CD ROM Component CD ROM Ordering Number AEM NB R 1 5 Customer Documentation on CD ROM includes 363 211 400 2 User Service Manual USM Functional Description a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to Order This Document 8 How to Order This Document Ord
83. parameters are assumed to be known by the Operator m The DCN link with the NEs is available cf Appendix A m Domains are already created cf Chapter 4 3 1 AEM NB R1 5 5 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration a Add NE Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an NE Step Procedure 1 Select ALL in the Network Browser and Create NE via the cursor menu or select File gt New gt NE or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Create gt NE via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up NE Details NE View l Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing source Control Date amp Time l NE Data NE Name INES NE id 4 Communication Info IP Address 5 88 20 8 Apply TID isystemos Apply 4uthentification Login Password Connection Connection State Not Connected Connect Figure 5 6 NE Name Information Window While creating a new NE the tab NE Details is active by default 2 Enter an appropriate NE name in the corresponding field All characters are allowed the maximum length is 30 characters At this stage the fields Communications Info Authentication and Connection are not avail able The field NE id shows a unique identifier internally used by the AEM NB 3 Press Apply to confirm The Domain Selection window pops up AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 17 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipmen
84. pay load of a DS1 link bound to a feeder of the AnyMedia NE The AnyMedia Access System provides access for a remotely located OS if it communi cates via TCP The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 This alternative can be used if no local Ethernet LAN is avail able or the outside plant OSP environment is too severe for a router It does not need a separate DCN then it can be a cheaper solution The pro tocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 3 TL1 over Telnet session File Transfer Protocol TL1 over raw TCP also supported TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 HDLC HDLC Figure A 3 AnyMedia Remote Operations Channel ROC Protocol Profiles For establishing communication between the AEM NB and the NE the NE must be minimally configured with its LAN ROC or CIT parameters as applicable This option is the only available as the AnyMedia Access System does not support re mote boot and remote TCP IP configuration The GSI NB can be used to provide this initial configuration of the NE using the CIT port AEM NB R1 5 A 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration AEM NB Communication Capabilities A 5 AEM NB Communication Capabilities The AEM NB uses for communicating management data an external system LAN interface The protocol profile in the AEM for this scenario is shown in Figure A 4 TL1 over Telnet session
85. perform a standby card test over m the standby COMDAC pack or m the protection IO DS1 pack Procedure To schedule a standby card test enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 8 page 5 121 Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block gt NOTE It is not possible to start the standby card test via the Network Browser is planned for the future Parameters in the The parameters in the common block have the following meaning Common Block Table 6 12 Common Block Parameters for SCHED EX INVL Periodicity The number x DAY x 0 365 Interval of days between two 0 means that the test standby card tests schedule execution is reset STM The time of the day hh mm_ hh 0 23 hour of day Start Time when standby card tests mm 0 59 minute of hour shall be performed Please refer to the AMAS R1 2 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format re strictions error conditions etc Result Depending on the standby card test result the following behaviour can be ob served m If the test is successful the side switch will be performed m If the test fails then no side switch will be performed Additionally an alarm will be raised in this case AEM NB R1 5 6 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 6 4 4 Built in Self T
86. provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 5 2 page 5 45 Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible values cf Table 5 2 page 5 45 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp The check box Slot Required displays the required state of Protection the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted The Apply button is available only if the required state of CU has been modified by the operator AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 43 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration A Parameters Buttons Description Action Port Informa This pane contains a table displaying port information This tion information is presented in a 4 column table The table is sorted by Physical Port id A scroll bar allows
87. rameter Possible values 0 11 6 step 0 1 Default 11 6 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 109 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 7 15 Service Details GSFN T04 Overview The T04 4 wire transmission only function is used in voice or data private lines It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which may be used in the MDS2 MDS82B interfacing with a switch other transmission equipment data equipment or cable Menu Description Service Details Parameters Description TRMT This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 7 dB Transmit This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the transmit path When the Black option is selected the chan nel unit Supports an input TLP range of 9 0 to 7 5 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an in put TLP range of 16 0 to 0 5 GB Possible values Black White Default Black 7 dB Receive This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the DBR receive path When the Black option is selected the channel unit Supports an input TLP range of 16 to 0 dB When the White option is s
88. set Set if the loopback is cleared AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 29 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management b Via the TL1 Command Line Interface To set a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 8 page 5 121 a parameter Command code blocks To clear a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 8 page 5 121 D parameter Command code blocks Please refer to the AMAS R1 2 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc AEM NB R1 5 6 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance 6 5 Information Management and Maintenance 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States Connection States There are five NE AEM NB connection states They depend on the availability of a TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and NE and also on the AEM NB s attempt to open a TL1 communication session with the NE NOT CONNECTED Initial NE state when there is no connection between AEM NB and NE and the AEM NB is in a passive state avoiding any possibility of connection establishment with the NE NOT_CONNECTED TRYING Initial NE connection establishment state when the TL1 communication session between t
89. the screen The window frame will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Size Allows interactive resizing of the window Move the cursor appear ing in the window to the window edge you wish to move The edge will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Minimize The window is shown as an icon Maximize The window is shown in its maximum possible screen size Lower lf there are several overlapping windows the currently active win dow is shifted to the bottom of the pile Close This function will close the window and remove it from the user in terface exiting the application linked to the window AEM NB R1 5 3 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows ee 3 3 6 Menu Bar Menu Options The menu bar of a window contains the menu names Once you click on a menu it opens and a series of related menu options will be displayed under the menu name Conventions Each option represents a function which can be used to control the application running in the window To call this function click on the required option A menu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option e g in the menu below Network View gt Maps A grayed menu name or option cannot be selected Submenu Conven Submenus are menus opening under a certain menu option and containing a tions number of related menu options Some menu options are prov
90. tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Balance1 Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or BAL1 CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed Balance2 Mode This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote Alarm Indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM NB R1 5 5 100 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning as 5 4 7 4 Service Details GSFN 2NOS Overview The 2NOS 2 wire transmission only with sealing current is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs Service Details Parameters Description Z This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1
91. to For platform alarms it is the string EM m Object_ld Object identifier referring to the alarm Examples of objects are network el ements ASSOC etc Status Working status of the alarms Raised Alarm with alarm condition raised and has not been yet processed Acknowledged The alarm is still active and being investigated Cleared Alarm condition has been cleared or the user has requested the clearing of this alarm m Date amp Time First Raise Date and Time of the first Raised status in the life cycle of one alarm m Date amp Time Last Change Date and Time of the last status change in the life cycle of one alarm Occurrences Number of times the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the current time m User Ack The last user which has acknowledged an alarm AEM NB R1 5 6 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring TT ee 6 3 3 4 2 Sorting Alarms Summary The user can sort alarms by the different fields by clicking on the respective header The sort can be ascending or descending order The sort order is re versed by clicking on the respective header All alarm fields are sorted by alphanumeric order except dates severity and status fields m Inthe severity field alarms are sorted in the logical order Critical Major Minor and Information m Inthe status field alarms are sorted in the logical order Raised Acknowl edge a
92. to be synchronized To change synchronization settings see Chapter 5 3 2 2 page 5 46 Autonomous Re There are various types of autonomous reports that are used to keep consistency ports between configuration changes in the NE and AEM NB database e g LED status reports switch reports For an NE the user can disable the sending of autono mous reports reports can be inhibited enabled separately or collectively But to maintain consistency between the NE configuration data and the AEM NB data base these configuration reports have to be enabled Synchronization The following figure illustrates the NE state model depending on the synchroniza States Diagram tion state between the data kept in the NE and the AEM NB database AEM NB R1 5 6 32 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance Out of sync Detection Sync Process Success amp Message Buffer Overflow Detection Conf Reports Enabled Conf Reports Inhibition Detection C Sync Process Fail Figure 6 11 NE Configuration Data Synchronization States Sync Process Fail Sync Process Success amp Conf Reports Disabled Sync Process Succes Conf Reports Enabled SYNC ASYNC There are the following two NE configuration data synchronization states m SYNC The AEM NB database is consistent with the locally stored NE information and all the autonomous messages concerning configuration changes are enabled conf
93. to clear a fault For ex tenance Actions ample some network disturbances can also originate in hardware faults Such hardware faults often require the faulty component to be replaced and this can only be done by maintenance personnel gt NOTE More detailed information about maintenance actions is provided in Chap ter 6 Fault Clearance Once the fault has been cleared the alarm is reset automatically 1 4 3 2 Network Modification Types of Network Usually network operation amp surveillance requires structural modifications in the Modification network The AEM NB supports this There are two types of network modifica tions Installation or removal of NES Modification of NEs 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and Removal of a NE Installation of a NE For installing a new NE in an existing network the following steps must be carried out 1 Check whether the new NE can be incorporated in the existing DCN plan drawn up in the network planning phase if not the DCN plan must first be revised Creation of the NE Assignment of the NE to a domain Logical connection of the NE Selection of the timing synchronization source Selection of the COMDAC protection scheme simplex duplex ma OO ge ee IN Selection of those slots for which an absence of the circuit pack will be alarmed All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 AEM NB R1 5 1 24 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Working with AEM NB
94. values 600 900 Default 600 This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O When no check mark is set the channel unit will not transmit the reverse loop current feed signaling state toward the digi tal facility Possible values Set Not set Default Not set This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle When a check mark is set the channel unit is configured for full time on hook transmission Possible values Set Not set Default Not set This option menu can be used to define whether Loop Start or Ground Start is used Possible values LS GS Default GS AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 107 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 7 12 Service Details GSFN OCU 1 2 3 Overview The OCU 1 2 3 office channel unit dataport 1 2 or 4 data rates is app
95. you auto start the dae mon via commands in your operating system star tup scripts If you do not configure automatic startup you will have to start the server dae mon by hand or re run this utility to configure auto start Would you like to configure automatic server Startup and shutdown yes 34 Press Return Successfully created etc rc2 d S800store4 Successfully created link from etc rce2 d K800store4 to etc rce2 d S800store4 Note that you must manually remove or edit ex isting ObjectStore R3 scripts in etc rc2 d in some situations To run only R4 clients or R3 file database cli ents remove all R3 scripts in etc rc2 d To run all R4 clients and R3 clients including R3 rawfs clients edit existing R3 scripts in etc rce2 d to run only the R3 Directory Manager but not the R3 Server To run both R3 and R4 clients with separate R3 and R4 Servers see the documentation on editing your OS_ROOTDIR etc ports file This script will now verify the installation The ObjectStore Server daemon process is acces sible Schema databases are accessible The cache manager launcher for release 4 lt Ob jectStore path gt sunpro lib oscminit has correct modes and ownership AnyMedia Servers lactallahon ObjectStore configuration completed Transferring lt LUANY16S gt package instance AEM NB R1 5 2 20 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedu
96. 1 is not in serted and the required state of the IO DS1 has been modi fied by the operator The read only text field Protection State shows whether the selected IO DS1 is working or not Possible values Working providing service or Standby not in service The Protection button provides access to the Shelf Pro tection window AEM NB R1 5 5 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nn Parameters Buttons Description Physical DS1 The information in this field is displayed in a table 4 rows Information one per physical DS1 Physical DS1 Physical address of the DS1 feeders Feeders are DS1 circuits used to provide the Virtual Remote Terminal VRT or INA Virtual Bank VB feeder facilities Format ds1 slot port e g ds1 1 4 m Logical DS1 id This is the id used to identify logical feeders Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Once a row in the table is selected the Add Edit Logi cal DS7 button becomes available 2 Use the check box Slot Required in the pane Operation amp Protection to define the required slot state 3 Click on Apply to confirm the change of the state of the shelf slot the window remains on screen for further use Go to step 4 to modify protection go to step 5 to edit the logical DS1 4 Use the 1 O DS1 Protection button to open the Shelf Protection window
97. 1 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next one The first can be modified at installation time to a value between 1024 and AEM NB R1 5 2 26 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 IP multicast adresses Using OrbixTalk all communications takes place using multicast addresses The range of IP mul ticast addresses used by OrbixTalk is 31 with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is config urable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 5 The Install_AMEMR15 script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 6 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths usr bin usr sbin and usr ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 7 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media
98. 11001 11003 11005 and 11007 for FTP communica tion the port number 20 for FTP data transmissions and the port number 21 for FTP control communication AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 A 7 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations o ee ea Association configuration related to NEs For every NE with which the AEM NB has to communicate the NEs Target Identifier TID must be known by the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI For every NE with which the AEM NB wants to communicate the LOGIN information related to that NE must be introduced in the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI For every NE the AEM NB wants to communicate with the PASS WORD information related to that NE must be known by the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI A 6 1 4 Element Manager Client Configuration Client IP Parame The workstation with the AEM NB client has the following IP parameters config ters ured Note that if the client is located at the same machine as the server these pa rameters are already configured m IP address e g 135 88 20 230 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 m default router e g 135 88 17 1 AEM NB Prefer In the preferences file of the AEM NB client the following information must be ences File stored to be able to access the AEM NB server this file has to be created before starting the AEM NB client GUI m The AEM NB server IP address e g 135 88 20 234
99. 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 RCV This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM NB R1 5 5 104 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning a 5 4 7 9 Service Details GSFN ETO4 Overview The ETO4 4 wire equalized transmission only function is used in private lines voice or data when equalization of cable transmission characteristics is required It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit Service Details Parameters Description TRMT This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 RCV This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 7 dB J3 When the Black option is selected the channel unit sup DBJ3 ports an input TLP range of 15 0 to 1 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 8 0 to 8 5 dB Possible values Black White Default Black Load Non Load This option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or non loaded distribution cable
100. 3 32 System management functions 6 18 T Tab 315 _ Target ID 5 19 TCP IP_CON REFUSED 6 40 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 11_ Testroutines Access tothe 6 23 AP card test 6 26 AP card test result 6 27 Built in self test 6 29 Loopback test 6 29 Port test 6 24 Port test result 6 25 Result of standby card test scheduling 6 28 Standby card test scheduling 6 28 Text box 3 15 timing source 5 52 timing source control primary source 5 53 secondary source 5 54 synchronization mode 5 53_ TL1_COMM_DENIED 6 41 Trademarks XII TST ANALG 6 24 6 26 AEM NB R1 5 IN 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Index Typographical conventions XIII X U X 25DCN A 9 Unassign controlled objects from domains 4 14 user groups access from applications 4 25 user groups access from domains 4 25 user groups access from tasks 4 26 users from user groups 4 6 User Create 4 2 Delete 4 6 Modify 4 4 User administration 4 1 User group Create 4 17 Delete 4 26 Modify 4 22 W Window controls 3 7 3 8 maximize button 3 9 menu bar 3 9 minimize button 3 8 scrollbar 3 9 title bar 3 8_ window frame 3 8 window menu 3 9 Window controls AEM NB windows 3 13 Window menu 3 10 Close 3 10 Lower 3 10 Maximize 3 10 Minimize 3 10 Move 3 10 Restore 3 10 Size 3 10 Windows basics 3 7 Workspace manager 3 12 Workspace menu 3 12 Logout 3 13 Minimize Restore Front Panel 3 13 Programs 3 13 Refresh 3
101. 3 not reprovisionable m FS for TR 08 DS1 a not reprovisionable m SF for TR 08 DS1 b d not reprovisionable m ESF for INA ESF or SF gt NOTE Values are only changeable for INA VB This option menu shows the line coding values Possible values are ZCS Zero Code Suppression or B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Suppression The default is B8ZS for TR 303 TR 08 and INA VRT VBs gt NOTE Values only changeable for TR 08 and INA ZCS is blocked for TR 303 VRTs Via this button the Logical DS1 Service State and the Logi cal DS1 Secondary Service State can be displayed Possible values for Service State IS In Service or OOS Out of Service Possible values for Secondary Service State AUTO Auto matic Non Alarmed LPBK Loop back MON Degraded Signal or YEL Yellow Alarm This command button will only be available in the following cases 1 There is a Physical DS1 Logical DS1 cross connection present 2 VRT VB Type is TR 08 and Line Code has been modi fied 3 VRT VB type is INA and any of the Frame Formats has been modified 6 Select the appropriate frame format in the option menu Frame Format rA Select the appropriate line coding value in the option menu Line Code 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 85 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 8 Click on Apply to confirm 9 Switch to tab Physical DS1 Data Physical DS1 Logical DS1 NE Name nes VRT VB
102. 4 kbit s ROC carried on a SPLL For managing up to 24 NEs connected to the LDS a single T1 interface for the router bridge is sufficient A 6 1 1 Router Configuration Configuration The minimal requirements for the router bridge for supporting this scenario are m Minimal WAN Interface Requirements The router bridge must have one or more channelized 1 544 Mbit s T1 in terfaces ITU G 703 G 704 An IP address may be assigned to each time slot or channel group m Minimal LAN Interface Requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purposes Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing is supported For the router bridge the following has to be provisioned m 11 interface functionality line code framing type etc Time slot mapping each needed serial interface will be a channel group mapped on a time slot of the channelized T1 m Protocols and encapsulations m P addresses for IP routing routing tables m Ethernet media The initial provisioning of a router bridge is typically performed by a VT 100 ANSI terminal connected to a RS 232C port When the IP address of the router is pro visioned the router may be configured via LAN TELNET SNMP depending on the router bridge used A 6 1 2 AnyMedia Network Element Configu ration The ROC over SPLL is the management interface used to access the NE The Initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory sett
103. 5 MCU 5405 AEM NB R1 5 SLC1DHOCAA E5ISFBOAAA SLCUVROBAA E5ISFAOAAA E5PQAXUAAA SLCUZNOBAA ESICNJOAAA SAPQADMBAA SACPHMOBAA SAPQAAV 5SSC4PTOCAA SAC1AKOAAA SAC1AHOAAA SSC3HJEAAA SSCUUJSAAB 5SC1FF2AXX SSCTFFGAAB SSCTBODAAA SSCTCBOAAA SAC1BFOAAB SAC1BGOAAB 5SC26TV2AA 5SC26T02AA Issue 2 09 99 5 31 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration TF ee 5 3 2 4 Configuration of Timing Source Overview The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes External DS1 The Line Code and Framing format for the external DS1 synchronization input must be provided External Composite Office Clock Free Running Mode For free running operation the NE derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator XO with an accuracy not worse than 32 parts per million ppm over full power supply temperature and life time The free running mode is intended only for turn up and failure condi tions Loop Timed Mode In this mode a selected feeder DS1 signal synchro nizes an internal phase locked loop The NE can loop time to any feeder DS1 input as required by TR303 However the system will only use two timing inputs selected via provisioning for protection reasons Timing Inputs The two timing inputs are identified as Primary Reference Source and Second ary Protection Source The first DS1 feeder of the first IO_DS1 plug in is the de fault primary input and the first feeder of the second IO_
104. 9 1 19 Functional Description Working with AEM NB Le 1 4 2 Configuration Management Introduction The Configuration Management in accordance with the specific operating condi tions of the network operator is performed by special provisioning actions It is as sumed that the NEs and AEM NB have already been physically connected Provisioning Figure 1 7 provides an overview of the provisioning actions and the text which fol Actions lows gives a detailed description Configuration Management NE and Domain Creation Equipment Configuration Service Provisioning Figure 1 7 Network Provisioning NE and Domain Prior to equipment configuration and service provisioning the NEs must be known Creation in the AEM NB To achieve this the following 4 steps are necessary 1 Creation of domains Creation of NEs Assignment of NEs to any domain s oe oN Logical connection of NEs All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Equipment NEs can be configured if they are known in the AEM NB The following measures Configuration should be performed m Selection of the timing synchronization source m Selection of the COMDAC simplex duplex and IO DS1 protection scheme m Selection of those slots for which an absence of the circuit pack will be alarmed m Provisioning of the protection switching AEM NB R1 5 1 20 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Working with AEM NB ae All steps are described in detail in
105. 9 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning as 5 4 7 13 Service Details GSFN SW56 Overview The SW56 Switched 56 kbps DDS service is also applicable to the SPQ452 dual OCU dataport including enhanced service options to the DDS Service Details Parameters Description Enhanced When the Enhanced Switched 56 kbps check mark is set Switch the channel unit supports the transmission of call progress tones to the CPE Customer Premises Equipment Possible values Set Not set Default Not set AB Signaling The AB Signaling parameter check mark is normally not set which causes the channel unit to operate in the software sig naling mode Possible values Set Not set Default Not set Quality Monitor When the Quality Monitoring parameter check mark is set ing the channel unit will send Abnormal Station Code to the Net work upon detecting an excessive number of bipolar viola tions from the loop Possible values Set Not set Default Not set 5 4 7 14 Service Details GSFN TD Overview TD O S A B C D 4 wire tandem office and 4 wire tandem subscriber 4 state Type Il Type I and 2 state Type Il Type I The tandem function is used for pro viding a back to back carrier interface for loop or ground start circuits It is appli cable to the SPQ444 channel unit Service Details Parameters Description TRMT This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa
106. AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 41 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration E SeSe 5 3 2 1 9 Configure CU The CU Channel Unit circuit packs provides the line side interface functionality that provide service to end users The corresponding window contains all information related to CU packs It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CU Channel Unit data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt CU in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack CU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The Channel Unit window pops up NE Name Linares Slot Number eu 1 1 Inventory Data Card Type Serial Number Aparatus Code ICC i l CLEI ECI Qperation amp Protection Slot Required Port Inforrration Physical Port ID YARATA B ID Logical TO ID Figure 5 20 Channel Unit Window AEM NB R1 5 5 42 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nn The following table shows the view edit options of the CU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the CU is plugged in Possible values cu 1 1 24 Inventory Infor The read only text fields
107. B R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 25 System Management Backup and Restore Le Backup Files Use the following command to make a backup of a database or directory If you enter none of the optional parameters a backup of all data necessary to restore the AEM NB will be done AEMNB backup c p path f file t INC FULL 1 level Parameter description C Aborts a running backup operation p path path is the directory or device to back up f file Location of the backup file file can be a local file or a locally mounted file in case a local tape device is used file specifies a soft label Default file names EM_SYSBCK_yyyymmdd fullbck for full backup EM_SYSBCK yyyymmdd incbck for incremental backup with yyyy year mm month dd day of the backup t INC FULL Type of backup incremental INC or full FULL Default FULL This parameter is ignored if I 0 is used level Specifies the backup level Files modified since last backup at a lower level are copied level 0 9 This parameter is ig nored if t FULL is used Restore Files Use the following command to restore a database or directory AEMNB restore c p path f file Parameter description C Aborts a running restore operation p path path is the directory or device to which the restored data should be written If no value is specified the original loca tions will be used f file Location of the backup file file can be a
108. B R1 5 files AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 5 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Ee 2 2 1 Full Installation This type of installation uses the Install _AMEMR15 script in order to install all packages contained in the distribution For the following description it is assumed that m The hardware and software requirements to install the AEM NB R1 5 are prepared m AEM NB R1 5 software have not been installed previously Common actions showed above have been made Procedure Complete the following procedure to install the AEM NB R1 5 application gt NOTE Lines with indentation and quoted are the system responses They are in cluded here to guide the installation procedure 2 2 1 1 Server side installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia server side Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed cdrom or disk 2 Type Install_AMEMR15 and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the applica tion please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 runs on SUN SPARC So laris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus se curity and Y2000 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM
109. Chapter 5 Service If the NEs are configured and integrated in the network cross connections can be Provisioning defined The following actions are necessary m Creation of VRT VB logical feeders m Changing of Voice Frequency Data Enhancement VFDE for TR 303 VRTs m Datalink Protection Switching for TR 303 VRTs Creation of VRT VB logical lines Subscriber m Cross connection logical line to logical feeder All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Network Status After the provisioning phase the NEs can now be controlled and monitored by the after Provisioning AEM NB and start operation amp surveillance 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance Actions During network operation amp surveillance the administration control and supervi sion of the network mainly include m Fault Management m Network Modification m Performance Monitoring Required The administrator rights are sufficient to perform all required operations The vi Rights sual check of parameters and displays on the GUI requires monitoring rights only 1 4 3 1 Fault Management Alarm Types There are two alarm types alarms generated by the NEs and alarms generated by AEM NB itself e g an alarm indicating that log files without archiving is being removed LOG_DEL_ FULL All alarms are displayed in the alarm viewer It al lows the network operator to detect the alarm and to locate its source General Fault Figure 1 8 page 1 22 shows the general fault
110. Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Do you like to continue y n q 51 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Re turn to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode I Client lt Client side installation gt 2 Server lt Server side installation gt Enter selection q 52 Type 1 and press Return Transferring lt LuJRERT gt package instance Transferring lt LuOxWRT gt package instance Transferring lt LUuANY16en gt package instance AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 27 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure FF EEE ee Transferring lt LUANY16C gt package instance jre 1 1 7 symantec Processing package instance lt LuJRERT gt from classes reportPro lt tmp lucent_pkg 1 gt lass installati pre EAE ore JRE 1 1 7 for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 sparc solaris 1 1 7 OK No previous package LuJRERT have been found Applications to install I gt jre version 1 1 7 2 gt symantec classes 3 gt report pro classes 4 gt all 5 gt exit Selection 53 Type 4 and press Return Enter install directory opt lucent jrel1 1 7 q 54 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR
111. DR DS1 1 Sa Z AP PLN 2 1 Saa LOG FDR DS1 28 Feeder 1 O DS1 i AP 2 2 iL LOG FDR DS1 1 Feeder 4 TR 08 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT 1 LLN 96 T1 Cross TO Cross e Connection Connection e Function LLN 1 Function une O S LLN 2 o LOG FDR DS1 1 ae TR 08 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT PLN 512 20 LLN 96 Feeder 1 I O DS1 5 Oo ai PLN 513 E INA VB 1 O Feeder 4 Physical DS 1 e Feeder Port Circuits e in O DS1s Pe CU 24 INA VB 20 PLN 608 Provisionable LLNs gt 640 LOG FDR Logical Feeder LLN Logical Line PLN Physical Line Figure 5 28 Cross Connection Diagram TO cross connections bind a Distribution Port a tip ring pair to a VRT or VB A maximum of 609 TO cross connections can be created in the AnyMedia Access System they are limited by the maximum number of Distribution Ports in the sys tem Each Logical TO may contain provisioning data for its associated physical sub scriber line In addition the TO data for locally switched services and ISDN lines on the TR 303 VRT can be administered by the LDS through its EOC When a physical subscriber line is TO cross connected to a VRT or VB it takes on the characteristics defined by the TO data for the corresponding logical port e g if a line from a PROG2W LPA380 AP is cross connected to a logical port that is provi sioned for POTS service it provides a loop start interface if the line is then cross c
112. DS1 Edit IO DS7 AEM NB R1 5 5 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window nn Cursor menu entries and asso Browser entries ciated windows All gt NE gt Shelf gt IO DS1 gt Physical DS1 Add Edit Physical DS1 Logi cal DS1 Loopback Physical DS1 LogI cal DS1 All gt NE gt Shelf gt COMDAC Edit COMDAC All gt NE gt Shelf gt CTU Edit CTU All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP Edit AP AP Test All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP gt User Port Logi Add Edit Logical TO Logical cal TO TO Physical Port Test All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2 1 MDS2 Shelf View All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2B 1 MDS2B Shelf View All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2 1 gt MSC Edit MSC All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2B 1 gt MSC Edit MSC All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2 1 gt PTU Edit PTU All gt NE gt Shelf gt MDS2B 1 gt PTU Edit PTU All gt NE gt MDS2 1 gt CU Edit CU All gt NE gt MDS2B 1 gt CU Edit CU All gt NE gt VRT VBs List Edit VRT VB List All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type Edit VRT VB List TR 303 TR 08 INA All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type Edit VRT VB TR 303 TR 08 INA gt VRT VB id Edit Logical DS1 List Logical DS1 List Edit Logical TO List Logical TO List Add Logical DS1 Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Add Logical TO Logical TO
113. DS1 plug in is the default secondary input The network provider can tailor the set of valid timing inputs and their priorities via provisioning The Primary and Secondary reference signals can be selected from any physical feeder inputs on any two IO_DS1 plug ins or from two feeder inputs on the same plug in The NE can continue to derive timing from the reference inputs if one or both of the physical inputs are switched to the pro tection IO_DS1 plug in For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements documentation Upon initialization the NE selects the primary input as the active reference and the secondary input as its alternate source If the primary reference fails the NE hardware switches to the alternate source providing synchronization reference source protection is available cf Chapter 5 3 2 7 page 5 59 Configuration Pro Complete the following procedure to configure the timing source cedure Step Procedure 1 Select the All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt Provisioning gt Timing Source Control via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Timing Source Control this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt Provisioning gt Timing Source Control AEM NB R1 5 5 52 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 C
114. E Thu Jtg Thu Jkr E Thu Jk E Thu Jk E Thu JELE Thu Jk E Thu 3k E Thu JELE Thu Jk E Page ofS Version 1 dn pyriy hid 194 basa berhihigy Stale kapni Froram ming aide Pam ple Sumnune Arup lee i turin f Tha Jskee Tha J ti E Tha Jske Thu shee Thu J i Tha Jskes Thu Jiti Thu J tt E Thu she Thu Jiti Tha Jske E Tha J kt E Thu J tt E Tha Jske E Tha J ti Thu kis Wo nu II ee lJ mee I C iai in a a a a a i Soa oe nt Figure 3 11 Print Preview Window AEM NB R1 5 3 22 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Backup and Restore Addons in Print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Print Pre Preview view Table 3 12 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then print out click on the printer icon cancel the print out click on Close view a single page preview click on the single page icon view a multi page preview click on the multi page icon change the magnification of the preview select another magnification with the option menu maximize restore the preview window click on the monitor icon 3 6 Backup and Restore The backup functions of the AEM NB allow you to copy AEM NB related file sys tems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption The AEM NB system files and database backup allows to back up and restore system files and databases belonging to the installed applications e g configuration
115. EM NB R1 5 2 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 363 211 402 gt NOTE A list of DNS user group items of the target system is displayed for in stance anymedia lucent This provides information to select an user owner and a group owner for packages files Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent m W W Enter selection q 7 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuLUMRT gt y n AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 2 9 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe 8 Type y and press Return Installing Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuLUMRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuLUMRT 1log Install
116. ID ina 1 Cross Connection Physical DS1 Data Logical DSi Data DS1 Data DS1 ds1 1 1 3 Equalization 10 Degrade Threshold 10E 6 Loopback Clear Set Timing Source No Edit Service State Sec Service State Close Figure 5 37 Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Window Tab Physical DS1 Data This window provides physical DS1 information Parameters Buttons Description Physical DS1 This field displays the selected physical DS1 id already pop ulated Format ds1 shelf slot feeder Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Five possible O DS1s per shelf four possible feeders per lO DS1 Equalization This field is used to define the cable length to the DSX 1 This field is mandatory Possible values are 0 to 655 ft Default value is 0 ft Degrade Physical DS1 Signal Degrade Threshold Threshold Possible values are 10E 7 10E 6 10E 5 10E 4 AEM NB R1 5 5 86 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning nn Parameters Buttons Description Loopback This field displays the current loopback state clear or set Use the Label button on the right hand side to change the loopback state for loopback details see Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 29 Label Use this button to set or clear the physical DS1 loopback Depending on the loopback state reflected this command button displays the possible operation Clear if the loopback is set Set if the loopback is cleared
117. IO DS1 tab cf Chapter 5 3 2 7 page 5 59 to modify the current protec tion scheme or to perform protection switches 5 Select a row in the Physical DS1 Information list 6 Click on Edit Logical DS1 to open the corresponding Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window Chapter 5 4 3 Figure 5 36 page 5 84 The same result will be obtained by double clicking on any row AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 29 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration E SeSe 5 3 2 1 4 Configure COMDAC The COMDAC Common Data and Control circuit pack performs the main band width management and control functions for the system This corresponding window contains all the information related to the COMDAC It can be displayed even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the COMDAC data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt COMDAC in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack COMDAC in Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up COMDAC NE Name NE4 Slot comdac 1 1 Inventory Information Card Type COMDAC Serial Number 980008217407 Apparatus Code COM100 Program Code GUEI SLC1CGOCAA EGI 228863 Sw Version Teen icc 1 1 Operation amp Protection kd Protection State working Protection
118. If this group is shut down the AEM NB is shut down Level 2 Applications Server applications that can be started up and shut down individually without affecting the functioning of other ap plications Line Test Also called drop test This checks for open circuits short circuits leakages to ground foreign voltages or other faults on the subscriber line that connects an AP port circuit to the CPE The results are used to detect broken or bad quality wires even before the customer realizes a lack of quality LL PLL Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is not responsible for setting up this service Locale This is a geographic or political region that shares the same language and customs In this document a locale is also used to refer to the definition of the subset of a user s information technology environment that depends on language and cultural conventions Local Digital Switch LDS This is a switching machine that terminates a TR 303 VRT An example of an LDS is the Lucent 5ESS switch AEM NB R1 5 GL 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Glossary Localization This is the process of adapting a program for use in a specific locale LOG File This is the file used for listing all actions that have occurred in a system This information is generated and re corded concurrently and sequentially as transactions and events are processed in the
119. LL AnyMedia Ao_TASK Raised 26 1 1999 10 56 AM 32 LOG_DEL_FULL AnyMedia Act TASK Raised 26 1 1999 9 20 AM 33 LOG_DEL_FULL AnyMedia jlee_TASK Raised 26 1 1999 8 56 AM 35 Sw_VR_ILLEGAL NE3 ASSOC Cleared 26 1 1999 10 47 AM 36 TL1_COMM_D NE3 ASSOC Cleared 26 1 1999 10 47 AM 37 LOG_DEL_PART AnyMedia lee_TASK Raised 25 1 1999 11 56 PM 38 LOG_DEL_PART AnyMedia Ao_TASK Raised 26 1 1999 3 41 M 39 LOG_DEL_PART lAnyMedia Act_TASK Raised 26 1 1999 4 26 AM Close Figure 6 6 Alarm List Section 6 3 3 4 1 Alarm Parameters For each alarm the following alarm fields depending on the selected view can be displayed m Index Sequence number for each different alarm reported to the AEM NB the maximum sequence number is 100 000 m Alarm_Type Unique identification of each alarm type m Summary Contains text briefly describing the alarm The summary text is unique in the Element Manager m Severity Contains the default severity of the alarm AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 15 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN Information N m Service Affecting Specifies whether the alarm is subscriber service affecting or not Possible values Yes No Description Contains a full description of the alarm Host Unique text label in the AEM NB scope For NE alarms it is the NE Name that identifies the NE through all the AEM NB applications the alarm be longs
120. Logical TO selection and both Logical TO id and Physical Port id are present 5 Use the option menu GSFN to select an appropriate GSFN 6 Enter the desired Logical TO id s 7 Use the option menu Expected Pack Type to select a desired AP this step is optional 8 Use the check box Red Line to define whether the subscriber shall be red lined 9 Click on Apply to confirm AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 95 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning o E ee Switch to tab Service Detail to get edit service specific details of the selected GSFN GSFN Cross References DFLT cf Chapter 5 4 7 1 page 5 98 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX cf Chapter 5 4 7 2 page 5 98 2RVO cf Chapter 5 4 7 3 page 5 100 2NOS cf Chapter 5 4 7 4 page 5 101 BRI cf Chapter 5 4 7 5 page 5 102 TO cf Chapter 5 4 7 6 page 5 102 DX4N DX4R FX cf Chapter 5 4 7 7 page 5 103 EM4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 cf Chapter 5 4 7 8 page 5 104 ETO4 cf Chapter 5 4 7 9 page 5 105 DPT cf Chapter 5 4 7 10 page 5 106 FXO cf Chapter 5 4 7 11 page 5 107 OCU 1 2 3 cf Chapter 5 4 7 12 page 5 108 SW56 cf Chapter 5 4 7 13 page 5 109 TD cf Chapter 5 4 7 14 page 5 109 T04 cf Chapter 5 4 7 15 page 5 110 The following parameters are available for all Logical TO types Parameters Buttons Description NE Name Displays the NE name of the selected NE VRT VB id Displays the selected VRT VB id GSFN Displays the selected GSFN for the Logical TO
121. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services Release 1 5 User Service Manual 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 Copyright 1999 Lucent Technologies All rights reserved Printed in U S A This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Lucent Technologies except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Ordering Information The order number for this document is 363 211 402 For more ordering information refer to How to Order Documents in the section About This Document How to Comment on This Document A feedback form is located immediately after the legal page of this document Please send or fax your comments and suggestions to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Trademarks Acrobat Reader is registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AnyMedia is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies Internet Expl
122. Management and Maintenance Alarms BE SeSe AEM NB R1 5 6 42 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Contents A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 6 1 A 6 2 363 211 402 Overview DCN Introduction Terms Used in this Chapter NE Communication Capabilities AEM NB Communication Capabilities Sample DCN Configurations Remote Operations Channel Over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 6 1 1 A 6 1 2 A 6 1 3 A 6 1 4 A 6 1 5 A 6 2 1 A 6 2 2 A 6 2 3 A 6 2 4 A 6 2 5 Router Configuration AnyMedia Network Element Configuration Element Manager Server Configuration Element Manager Client Configuration Local Digital Switch Configuration X 25 DCN Router Configuration Configuration of AnyMedia Network Element Element Manager Server Configuration Element Manager Client Configuration Transport Elements Configuration AEM NB R1 5 gt a N N P N mi oO T oO a oO i op T fo 3 N T Co cd Co o e T 7 T D a Issue 2 09 99 A I A SSS Contents AEM NB R1 5 A II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration A 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about m DCN introduction General definitions of terms m Network Element management communications m AnyMedia Element Manager management communications Sample DCN configurations A 2 DC
123. Modify User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the properties of a user group Be fore modifying the properties of a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group shall be assigned access permissions to all applications and tasks and these access permissions shall not be modified Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 24 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User Administratio File view Help Figure 4 25 Window User Administration AEM NB R1 5 4 22 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User Groups a 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears User Administration n ooo Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitering Monitoring Group Description Figure 4 26 User Groups Table AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 23 User Management User Groups E SeSe 4 Select one user group of the User Group Name field and click Open The User Group Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user group User Group Profile User Group Name Description Users Dorrains Applications
124. N Introduction AEM NB Features Communication of AEM NB and NE DCN 363 211 402 The AnyMedia Access System is designed to provide a full range of narrowband access services like POTS ISDN and Leased Lines The AnyMedia Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB will provide the standard management configuration equipment configuration fault and test ing performance and security functions capabilities to do service management monitoring generate reports and printouts do backup and restore functions for example to improve the customer s day to day business The AEM NB will communicate with the network elements by using TL1 com mands over TCP IP TL1 over raw TCP can also be used and FTP over TCP IP A communication with TL1 commands over Telnet is only possible via cut through The AnyMedia AEM NB is also prepared in the first release to communicate with other legacy OSs by means of TL1 northbound pass through interfaces TL1 will be used for request response and autonomous reports commands and FTP will be used for software and database upload download operations The Data Communications Network DCN is the communications infrastructure routers WAN links etc needed for communication of the AEM NB with the NEs AEM NB R1 5 Issue2 09 99 A 1 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Terms Used in this Chapter it manages This manual refers to AEM NB Release 1 5 and AnyMedia NE Re lease 1 5 For this r
125. No Continue with step 2 2 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 page 3 32 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 37 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms ee 6 6 4 2 LOG_DEL_PART Meaning A log type not yet archived has been deleted due to lack of available space Abbreviation LOG _DEL_PART Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects The respective log type can neither be viewed nor archived Possible Cause s There may be a problem or an abnormal situation in the AEM NB or the config urable size limits of the log system have not been chosen correctly Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Archive the remaining logs to prevent them from being deleted 2 Check the AEM NB for problems or abnormal situations Have there any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 3 No Continue with step 3 3 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 page 3 32 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits 6 6 4 3 NEASSOC_LOST Meaning The AEM NB lost the management association with the net
126. Only one TR303 VRT can be supported in NE R1 2 U Upgrade Is a type of migration where the software release is changed from an earlier release to a later release Upload The process of moving information from a client to a server at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Intended applications of this capability are software updates and restoring databases User The operator who will use the EM to provision maintain and monitor the AnyMedia Access System User Identifier UID This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null Grouping of UID string values for this command is not allowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alohanumeric character string User Module A module that provides an interface to the users or to other external systems to the AnyMedia EM functionality V VB Virtual Bank This is the entity that groups a feeder and various drops for permanent leased line services in a simi lar way to the VRTs for switched traffic AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 GL 11 Glossary B W Workload or Load A mix of actions and their frequencies from all possible input points that need processing in some way in the sys tem Z Z port A Z port is circuitry built on a POTS AP to provide a Z interface for analog subscribers Note that more than one Z port is housed on an AnyMedia POTS AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Z port
127. Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt EM NE Synchronization via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Synchronization this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt EM NE Synchronization NE Details NE View Sy nehrongation WE Inventory Data Timing source Control Date amp Time Configuration Alarms gyne State ASYNC Sync State ASYNC Sync Resyric Autonomous Outputs States E pote ee 6g oye Sey Bo on E Gaara ooo Bad cH Aa og fromee oo eons olin eS aoe 28 Sata She rates FE Age oe E bl Beas M PJA RIAIN MIMA EYO SAMAL IID MPP at ag na BA EO ee ry tres a rae rey PREC ee tar reer O E a eee tea ee E bl E BIDON IPIE A MEME nba gs sla SS bab brie Qeiestntiivas na Ps x Rosey flapes eater eves Kiper tho HBG te ee OE oY MENS ECS Figure 5 21 NE Name Information Window Tab Synchronization AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 47 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration o E Parameters Buttons Description Configuration The Sync State represents the configuration synchroniza tion state between the AEM NB and NE This information is obtained from the NE and it will be automatically updated Possible values are Sync and Async Alarms The Sync State represents the alarm processing state be tween the AEM NB and NE This information is
128. OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt gt NOTE A list of partitions and free space is displayed Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on lt information about your partitions and free space gt Where should the main OrbixTalk software dis tribution be installed opt lu cent OrbixTalk1 2c02 21 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Which UDP IP port should the OrbixTalk Direc tory Enquiries daemon use OrbixTalk requires that you reserve a range of AT LEAST 2 ports starting at this port 5000 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 15 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a 22 Type a valid UDP IP port and press Return press Return to select de fault The OrbixTalk Directory Enquiries daemon as Signs individual Topics an IP Multicast address starting with the next address above the base IP address What base IP Multicast address within the range 225 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 should the OrbixTalk Directory Enquiries daemon use 225 0 0 0 23 Type a valid IP multicast address and press Return press Return to select default What directory should the OrbixTalk data files be stored opt lucent OrbixTalk1l 2c02 dat 24 Type a valid path for instance
129. P WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM Modem ISDN Network Adapter TCP IP PPP mercer Bridge Router pee ee ee errr Pup TCP IP LAN E E NE NE sepe le fe le fe le NE eee le fe fe le le NE Figure 1 12 AEM NB Server with Clients and external OS WAN AEM NB R1 5 1 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Contents 2 1 General 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 Installation Procedure 2 2 1 Full Installation 2 2 1 1 Server side installation 2 2 1 2 Client side installation 2 2 2 Individuals Package Installations 2 2 3 Cancel Installation 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package Installations 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers package 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyMedia Client package 2 2 4 3 Remove Third Party packages 2 3 Configuration Parameters 2 3 1 Introduction 2 3 2 AnyMedia Server Configuration Parameters ae AnyMedia client lt GUI gt configuration variables AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 I A SSS Contents AEM NB R1 5 2 II Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning 2 1 General 363 211 402 The AEM NB R1 5 AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrow band Services Release 1 5 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus security and Y2000 patches and patch 106255 01 recom mende
130. Port Test cf Port Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 24 Test Manager gt AP Test cf Chapter 6 4 2 AP page 6 26 TL1 gt Cut through NE Window gt Cascade Any Window gt Window 1 Any Window gt Window 2 Any Help gt Index Any displays the help index for navigation through the EM help information Help gt On Window Any case sensitive online help 5 2 3 Status Bar Feedback from the NE is displayed on screen as is progress information related to the commands issued by the AEM NB This feedback is provided by the status bar incorporated at the bottom of every single screen except Network Browser and Menu bar Message area feedback Progress area Progress bar Obtaining operational state for ds1 1 1 2 ao m Stop Cancel button Figure 5 5 Status Bar Example The status bar is composed of three sub areas m Message area Used to display feedback It indicates what is being done The last feedback message sent by the NE is displayed until a new com mand is sent or the window is closed m Progress area Informs the user there are jobs running AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 11 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window ELE m Stop Cancel button for commands allows cancellation of commands Note that Cancel does not imply undo If you try to close the window and the last command executed has not finished yet you will be informed Warning window that ther
131. Port by setting up a TO cross connection between that port and the logical line specified by the CRV AEM NB R1 5 GL 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Glossary Cross Connection Several types of cross connections are present in the AnyMedia Access System m T1 cross connections provide links between physical DS1 feeder ports and the logical feeder ports of the VRTs and INA Virtual Banks VB They are created and deleted using the TL1 commands ENT CRS T1 and DLI CRS T1 The creation of a T1 cross connection acts as a trigger within the NE to instantiate the associ ated VRT or VB m TO cross connections provide links between the logical ports of a VRT or an INA VB and the physical distri bution ports of the NE They are created and deleted by the TL1 commands ENT CRS T0O and DLI CRS TO0 m Finally the undifferentiated term cross connection describes an actual bandwidth assignment within the system s TSI fabric Such bandwidth assignments are administered dynamically by the TR 303 TMC they are administered semi permanently by the TR 303 EOC and they are created automatically by the NE in re sponse to provisioning activities on TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs Circuit This refers to the devices and functions built on or provided by an AP for one port In some documents this is also called facility The subscriber line is not included Client An entity that initiates requests to a server For the AnyMedia Access System a client could be a PC with a G
132. Possible values N L Default N Bandwidth This slider can be used to control the frequency response characteristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Sealing Current When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 105 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 7 10 Service Details GSFN DPT Overview The DPT dial pulse terminating function is used for a DID Direct Inward Dial with either dial pulse or multi frequency addressing It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for DID trunks Service Details Parameters Description Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Defa
133. R Pulse Link Repeater POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PPP Point to Point Protocol PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PT Power Test PTU Power Test Unit R RAM Random Access Memory RCV Receive RDLD Red Lined REPT Report ROC Remote Operations Channel ROM Read Only Memory RTLP Receive Transmission Level Point RTU Remote Test Unit 2RVO 2 Wire Loop Reverse Battery Originate EEEE SoS S SCC Secondary Channel SCEC Secondary Channel Error Correction AEM NB R1 5 AB 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Abbreviations SDEE Supported Entity Exists SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SGE Supported Entity Outage SL Slope SLC Subscriber Loop Carrier SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Line SW Software OO l T TA Terminal Adapter Test Area TAP Test Access Path TCA Threshold Crossing Alert TCP Transmission Control Protocol TID Target Id TL1 Transaction Language 1 TLP Transmission Level Point TM Timeslot Management TMC Timeslot Management Channel TMN Telecommunication Management Network TNM Total Network Management AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 AB 9 Abbreviations ee TO Transmission Only TRMT Transmit Attenuator Parameter TS Test TS Timeslot TTLP Transmit Transmission Level Point TIMT Tandem Transmit Attenuator Parameter U UART Universal Asynchronous Receiv
134. Release 1 5 server as lt LuANY16S gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt lt files list gt verifying class lt channels_24 gt Executing postinstall script Starting orbixd daemon in the system Starting ns daemon in the system s1224 OrbixNames Release 1 1 s1369 OrbixOTM package Release 1 5 J Checking AnyMedia EM R1 5 naming contexts Starting CreateNEM db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting NEM data base path OK Creating NEM Data Base OK exit OK Starting CreateCMR12_ db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting CM R1 2 data base path OK Creating CM R1 2 Data Base AEM NB R1 5 2 24 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a SeS OK exit OK Starting AMDbPopulate process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting Alarm data base path OK Creating Alarm Data Base Creating os_Collection lt HostElement gt Creating ListOfAlarmsPerHost Creating segment and ElementManager Host OJ eens OK exit OK Getting the AnyMedia installation path Getting OAM Security data base path OK Creating Database Registering Servers in the Orbix Implementation Repository 20948 New Connection lt hostname gt lt domain_name gt IT dae
135. Run Time OK No previous package LuOXWRT have been found Enter install directory opt lu cent OrbixWeb3 0 q 57 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Package lt LUJRERT gt jre 1 1 7 have been found in lt jre Path gt AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 29 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe If you don t plan to use fully qualified host names with OrbixWeb enter null here Checking your DNS domain name done What is your DNS domain name default es lu cent com 58 Type your domain name and press Return or reply null if all machines have fully qualified host names press Return to accept default Enter the NS hostname 59 Type the NS host name and press Return Enter the NS IP address 60 Type the NS IP adress and press Return Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP W 1 anymedia lucent W W Enter selection q 61 Type an user group number User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which
136. The size calculated is based on maximum configurations and includes the overhead necessary for the temporary data used in operation lt is recommended to create a separate partition to locate the transaction log file needed by ObjectStore This partition would be used for this purpose only It must not be deleted or managed because this file is only created and managed by Ob AEM NB R1 5 2 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning General ee jectStore Note that without this file ObjectStore is not able to work and also ifa new partition or location is chosen it needs write permissions for the AnyMedia user login If you choose a directory under AnyMedia location the correct owner and permits will be automatically provided in the installation process of AnyMedia The following table shows the recommended size of the partitions for a maximum of 10 40 and 100 NEs NEs part 2 100 100 MB where part1 contains all the AEM NB server software and data bases and the part2 is dedicated to the transaction log Distribution Media The AEM NB R 1 5 distribution media is on CD ROM and the defaults installation directories are opt lucent Application_name refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 for more information about application names The AEM NB R1 5 distribution is divided into eleven packages as follows m AnyMedia Servers mw AnyMedia Client lt GUI gt mw AnyMedia Help m OrbixMT2 3c patch 02 m OrbixTalk1 2c patch
137. UI in terface a telnet session or an OS like the AEM NB Client Application A group of one or more user modules that offer related functionality Client Host A machine where one or more user modules are installed Common Data and Control Pack COMDAC This performs the main bandwidth management and control functions of the system Configuration Management This consists of a set of functions for controlling the network elements including initialization parameter setting starting and stopping and collecting information about the NE configuration Controlled Objects An entity defined via type and value Where type is defined as NE for AEM NB R1 0 but later when unbundled it requires the ability to configure type as VRT for the 24 channel product Value will identify one specific managed NE or VRT Interface CIT Craft Interface Terminal A local RS232 connection on the AnyMedia access system to which a PC GUI can be connected D Date This refers to the day month and year and represents a calendar function that needs to include a calculation for leap years and a capability of determining the day of the week from the date and must be Y2K compliant DCN Data Communications Network the communication media and interconnected devices used to exchange manage ment information between the AEM NB the NEs and other OSs Defaults These are the parameter values built into the NE when it is shipped from the factory Default values
138. Value AnyMe dia which cannot be deleted Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 9 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User Administratie File view Help Figure 4 10 Window User Administration AEM NB R1 5 4 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Domains ee 3 Select View gt Domains The Domains Table appears User Administration mm ooo o oo Domains o Figure 4 11 Domains Table AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 9 User Management Domains 4 Click New The Domain Profile window pops up Domain Profile Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Mot Assigned Assigned Type Value User Groups User Groups Net Assigned Assigned dministrator Maintenance Monitoring D Be Dee Figure 4 12 Window Domain Profile 5 Enter a new domain name in the Domain Name field this is mandatory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more controlled objects that shall belong to the new domain in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value
139. Window AEM NB R1 5 5 32 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning ee Equipment Configuration The following table shows the view edit options of the CTU window Parameters Buttons NE Name Slot Inventory Infor mation Operation amp Protection Description NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot number where the CTU is plugged in The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value CTU Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value DTP100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed in the case of CTU regardless of the slot status Default state for CTU Not Required empty check box The Apply button is available only if th
140. a E Edit button 3 15 Environment Alarms 6 35 Escape key 3 6 External LAN AEM system interface A 5 External LAN interface profiles A 3 External system LAN interface A 3_ Dn F Fault clearance 1 23 identification 1 22 source 1 23 Fiber Reach 5 122 arr File Close 6 12 6 18 Exit 6 12 6 18 New 6 12 6 18 Print 6 12 6 18 Reload 6 12 6 18 Full backup database 3 23 H Help icon 3 5 Icon 3 8 Icons greyed 3 4 Incremental backup database 3 24 Input focus 3 7 Installation third party 1 19 IP Address 5 19 K Keyboard 3 6 Keys special Alternate 3 6 Backspace 3 6 Control 3 6 Delete 3 6 Escape 3 6 Return 3 6 ee L LAN interface external system A 3 Level 1 application 3 17 Life cycles network 1 18 List box 3 15 Log alarm 1 23 Log alarms 3 33 Log management 3 32 Log out workspace menu 3 13 Log shortening 3 33 Log size 3 32 AEM NB R1 5 IN 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Index Log type Actions 1 12 3 32 Autonomous Reports 1 12 3 32 System Internal Events 1 12 3 32 Log Viewer application 3 33 LOG DEL FULL 6 37 LOG DEL PART 6 38 Login 3 2 5 19 Logout manually from System 3 3 Loopback Clear 6 30 Set 6 30 Test 6 29 M MDS2 shelf 5 3 MDS2B Shelf 5 3 5 4 MDS2B Shelf View 5 25 Menu Actions 6 13 File 6 12 6 18 Filters 6 13 6 19 Help 6 13 Views 6 12 Menu bar 3 11 Menus often used File gt Exit 3 16 File gt Print 3 16 Help gt Index
141. access to the Logical TO window In this case the Physical Port id will be trans ferred This button is enabled only if a physical port is se lected with no cross connection to a logical TO id The Edit Logical TO button provides access to the Logical TO window where you will be able to edit the logical TO pa rameters whenever this is possible or even remove the ex isting cross connection delete Logical TO of the selected User Port from the list This button is enabled only if a physi cal port cross connected to a logical TO is selected The Delete Logical TO button removes the cross connec tion selected in the list see above 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state AEM NB R1 5 5 36 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use If then you want to add a Logical TO select a row in the Port Information list and press Add Logical TO The Logical TO List window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 7 page 5 90 you want to edit a Logical TO select a row in the Port Information list and press Edit Logical TO The Logical TO window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 8 page 5 112 you want to delete a cross connection select the desired Logical TO id in the Port Information list and press Delete Logical T0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical TO wil
142. ages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuANY16C gt y n 78 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Client as lt LuANY16C gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script WHKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKEKEKKKKKKKKEKKEKEKEKKKKKKRKEKRKEKEEEN Execute AnyMediaNBEM GUI sh to set the environment Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You have the installation logfile in lt Client path gt EM_Install log Installation of lt LuANY16C gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 5 was successful lt Client side installation gt 22 2 Individuals Package Installations Also it is possible to install each package individually using the command pk gadd d package_name pkg refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 to obtain the pack ages names AEM NB R1 5 2 36 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure gt NOTE If the package is already installed on the target system the following ac tions must be make m the package must be un installed previously refer to Remove Any Media package Installations on page 40 for more inf
143. al DS1 External Composite Office Clock m Free Running Mode m Loop Timed Mode The provisioning options are described in Chapter 5 3 2 4 page 5 52 5 1 1 6 Plug amp Play Capabilities The circuit packs associated with the AnyMedia Access System have the capabil ity to self identify themselves with inventory data This capability is very useful during the execution of provisioning and maintenance procedures For example upon insertion of the new circuit pack in the AnyMeala Access Sys tem Shelf the inventory data of the new pack as well as its serial number slot and pack entity will be reported to the AEM NB and or GSI interface The removal of any plug in unit will be announced also 5 1 1 7 NE Equipment Configuration Related Tasks The NE equipment configuration facilities provided by the AEM NB cover the op erations that control and provision the NE including the following m Configuration Specific Equipment Data which involves tasks for m NE Creation amp Deletion m Circuit Pack Management COMDAC Management lO _DS1s Management Physical Feeder Management CTU Management AP Management m Protection Management AEM NB R1 5 5 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview m Slot Alarming Configuration m Date amp Time Management m NE Security Configuration m iming Synchronization Provisioning m Maintaining a local copy of the NE Provisioning Data which
144. amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned ver Ok Apply Figure 4 27 Window User Group Profile Change To change the user group name enter the new name in the User Group Name User Group Name field 3 to 30 characters Any characters are allowed Change User Group To change the user group description enter the new information in the Descrip Description tion field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding To assign further users to the selected user group click Users select one or more Users users in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 2 Removing To remove assigned users from the selected user group click Users select one Users or more users in the Users Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The last user of user group administrator is protected against deletions AEM NB R1 5 4 24 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Adding to Domains Removing from Domains Adding Applications Removing Applications Adding Tasks 363 211 402 User Groups To give the selected user group access to further domains click Domains select one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapte
145. an alarm buffer overflow The AEM NB alarm database is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time The AEM NB configuration data which are maintained for each NE are updated with the NEs configuration data The data from the NE non volatile data storage NVDS are used Association Maintenance Association NE Monitoring Default Values for Monitoring 6 34 Issue 2 09 99 An association between the AEM NB and an NE is established if the TCP IP con nection and the TL1 communication session are opened The NE state changes into CONNECTED The AEM NB monitors the association state of the NE by periodically sending messages RIRV HDR to the NE If the AEM NB does not receive a response to a certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the TL1 con nection to the NE is lost and closes the TCP IP connection to the NE By default these messages are sent by the AEM NB every five minutes The re sponse to a message must be received within four minutes and not more than two responses may be lost otherwise the TCP IP connection is closed by the AEM NB These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso clation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaNBEM cfg AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms 6 6 Alarms 6 6 1 Overview An alarm is reported for any condition that nee
146. ance Alarm Management Table 6 2 LED Meanings Circuit Pack Meanings 6 4 Issue 2 Table 6 1 Configure Notification Icon System Variable Possible States VISUAL_CRITICAL_ ALARM SEV On Off default ON VISUAL_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV On Off default OFF VISUAL_MINOR_ ALARM SEV On Off default OFF VISUAL_INFO_ALARM_SEV On Off default OFF For alarm notification see aslo Chapter 3 2 3 1 lO DS1 09 99 Shelf View Window This window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 23 provides general inventory provisioning and alarm information through the circuit packs LEDs Each slot shows the card type inserted and its alarms via a red FLT LED if avail able If the slot is empty no card will be shown See table below for the list of LEDs provided in each pack The table de scribes the color used when the LED is ON or blinking If the LED is OFF the color black is used FLT red m Lit during circuit pack failure m Flashes when the circuit pack executes off line self test Lit when the circuit pack is service active CLF1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 CLF3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 CLF4 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 4 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Fault Mana
147. and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar The VRT VB window pops up cf Figure 5 32 page 5 75 2 Choose the VFDE state Enable Disable by using the radio buttons in the field VFDE 3 Click on Apply to confirm A Warning window pops up in case of chang ing the VFDE state to Disable The operation may be service affecting Continue anyway 4 If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send an allow VFDE message in case of enable or an inhibit VFDE message in case of disable to the NE The following n Progress message will be shown in the status bar Disable Enable VFDE launched 5 4 5 Edit VRT VB Logical Feeder Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected the Logical Feeder is created and the Service State of the Logical Feeder is well known Procedure Complete the following procedure to change a Logical Feeder T1 of a VRT VB Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type gt VRT VB id in the Network Browser and Edit Logical DS1 List via the cursor menu or select Service gt Logical DS1 List via the Menu bar The Logical DS1 List window pops up 2 Select the appropriate VRT VB id in the table Logical DS1 List 3 Click on Edit Logical DS1 The Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 81 AEM NB R1 5 5 88 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configurat
148. any years of development expe rience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company The system is safe in normal operation There are however some potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated In particular these arise during the m Opening of housings or equipment covers Manipulation of any kind within the equipment even if it has been discon nected from the power supply Disconnection of optical or electrical connections through possible contact with m Live parts m Laser light Hot surfaces m Sharp edges or m Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 XIII About this Document General Safety Information E SeSe 6 2 General Safety Requirements In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum it is imper ative to observe the following rules m Installation configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective documenta tion Due to the complexity of the unit system the personnel requires special training The unit system must be operated by expert and authorized users only The user must operate the unit system only after having read and under stood the chapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation For complex systems additional training is recommended Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel must
149. are restored upon execution of an INIT SYS command AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 GL 3 Glossary tr Device Driver A program that controls a specific device such as a cartridge tape DAT Distribution Port The circuitry that provides narrowband access i e up to the 1 544 Mbps DS1 rate to a single network interface over one 2 or 4 wire metallic facility and converts between the format seen by this network interface e g analog voice frequency ISDN U interface etc and the internal format i e 4 Mbps timeslots Distribution Ports are con tained in Application Packs Channel Units for the AnyMedia Access System A maximum of 32 Distribution Ports are supported on POTS COIN Application Packs APs and a maximum of 16 Distribution Ports are supported on ISDN APs Download The process of moving information from a server to a client at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Expected applications of this capability are database retrievals Drop This comprises the wire to the customer and customer premises equipment CPE In some documents this is also called equipment DS1 ports DS1 circuits are used to provide the AnyMedia Access System shelf virtual remote terminal VRT or INA Virtual Bank feeder facilities and are physically located on the IO_DS1 circuit packs in the NE shelf DU Development Unit eee E EAS Element Access Server This is a CORBA server developed by Lumos Technol
150. asks m Fast and efficient fault detection and isolation m Prevention of unauthorized access by appropriate security mechanisms Reduction of operator mistakes by easy to use Graphical User Interface GUI a Integration with higher management levels for network service and busi ness purposes 1 2 1 Main Functions The AEM NB provides the following main characteristics functions Support of all AnyMedia Access Systems features Equipment Overview Common alarm handling for all network elements NEs m Report Log Backup amp Restore functions m TL1 NE access via TCP IP based on DON m User security handling user profiles NE domains m Online Help Multi User access m Northbound interfaces TL1 AEM NB R1 5 1 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Introduction ee 122 ISO Functional Areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration Management The Configuration Management supports the complete range of graphical func tions to provision and maintain the R1 2 NEs Network topologies shelf views and self explaining menus are navigating the operator to configure POTS ISDN BRA and Leased Line Services The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m Inventory management m Equipment provisioning and maintenance m Service provisioning m Clock synchronization m System Equipment Service status Software download m NE database backup and restore System date time synchr
151. ation Ee ee Parameters Buttons Description Port Informa This pane contains a table displaying port information This tion information is presented in a 4 column table The table is sorted by Physical Port id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be se lected to edit single row selection or delete single or multi ple row selection the corresponding Logical TO s through the use of the Edit Logical T0 or Delete Logical T0 but tons see below m Physical Port id Identifies the port within the applica tion pack Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 The following entries are available only if a port is already cross connected not yet implemented for R1 5 VRT VB id shows the VRT VB id on which the service is provided only available if the physical port is cross connected VRT VB id format v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Logical TO id Indicates the Logical TO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the physi cal port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA m GSFN Generic Signalling Function that identifies the service type provided The following values are possi ble DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN and 4DO only for ROC Un known The Add Logical T0 button provides
152. ation of lt LUuLUMRT gt was successful RogueWave 1 5 7 amp Processing package instance lt LuRWRT gt from 1 1 2 Installation lt tmp lucent_pkg 2 gt RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMed1i aNBEM R1 5 sparc 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 OK No previous package LuRWRT have been found Enter install directory opt lucent rw q 9 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent i W W Enter selection q 10 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements AEM NB R1 5 2 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuRWRT gt y n 11 Type y and press Return Installing RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 as lt LuRWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1
153. ation window has been opened via Equipment gt NE Inventory Data NE Details NE View Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing source Control l Date amp Time l NE Inventory _Shelf Slot Circuit Pa Apparatus Serial Nu eci cwi icc j Summary Number of Units Close Configuration Data not found NE maybe not connected xX Figure 5 22 NE Name Information Window Tab NE Inventory Data AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 49 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration o E ee Two non editable tables display NE inventory information The first table contains per slot data while the second one provides summarized information per card type Parameters Buttons Description NE Inventory Shelf Slot Numeric field that identifies the position of each data plug in unit Circuit Pack Type Mnemonic that identifies the circuit pack type Possible values cf Table 5 3 page 5 50 Apparatus Code Identifies the specific function provided by the plug in unit Possible values cf Table 5 3 page 5 50 Serial Number A 12 character alphanumeric code that identifies each plug in It includes the date and place of man ufacture ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in
154. ation window pops up User Administratio File view z Figure 4 18 Window User Administration AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 15 User Management Domains ee 3 Select View gt Domains The Domains Table appears User Administration ee ooo a Bomans o Figure 4 19 Domains Table 4 Select the domain which shall be deleted in the Domain Name field and click Delete 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 5 4 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User Groups 4 4 User Groups 4 4 1 Create User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new user group Before creating a new user group please pay attention to the following remarks m By default the AEM NB provides three user groups Administrator Mainte nance and Monitoring m The administrator user group shall be assigned access permissions to all domains applications and tasks m Before a user group can be created modified or deleted the AEM NB ad ministrator must have a system login m Applications are divided into tasks A user can be assigned a whole appli cation or only a subset of its tasks Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 20 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops
155. automatic or manual switches will be done un til the forced switch is reset Automatic Switch to Protection A switch provoked by a failed or missing IO DS1 to the protection unit Manual Switch to Protection The specified service IO DS1 has been manually switched to protection IO DS1 The Protection State displays the current protection state which will be updated as a result of a Protection Switch see below Possible values are Not Equipped Working and Standby AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 65 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration o E ee Parameters Buttons Description Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching Clear or Inhibit or Switch Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protec tion Clear Clears any active switch request and returns traffic on the protection pack to its original service pack provided this pack is functional Clear does not affect the Automatic Switch Inhibit lf applied on the protection pack service shall return to the protected pack and Protection Scheme changed to Disable If applied on the protected pack protection for this pack is disabled If this pack was providing service through the protection pack a protection to service switch will occur This protection switch remains in effect till a protection mode is cleared Forced Switch to Protection Switches service from the service pack to the protection pack no matter w
156. be subdivided into four different databases pases Alarm DB To maintain alarm information m OAM DB To maintain user administration domain information etc m NEDB Used to keep all the NE specific data considered to be a copy from the real NE There will be an NE DB per network element version managed m NE EM DB used to keep private NE data name status not retrieved from the real NE Backup Types There are three different backup types The following list shows their differences and advantages m Full backup A full backup copies a complete file system or directory e g all AEM NB data This method requires large numbers of backup tapes that take a long time to write and takes also some time to retrieve individual files because the backup drive has to move sequentially to the point on the tape where the file is located On the other hand using full backup makes it easier to retrieve small changes in file systems m Incremental backup An incremental backup only includes copies of new files and files that have changed since a previous backup It is available for database files only Re quires less resources but searching for a certain file on the incremental tapes can take time AEM NB R1 5 3 24 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Backup and Restore o T 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore Default Locations If a backup is done the four AEM NB databases the NVDS and the log files are of Data for Backu
157. bearer B channels provided to the subscriber Possible values 2B D B1 D B2 D D Default 2B D 5 4 7 6 Service Details GSFN TO Overview The TO transmission only no sealing current is used for a private line application with no DC signal It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for 2 wire non switched private lines Service Details Parameters Description Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O Balance This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 3 RCVGN This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 XMTGN This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 AEM NB R1 5 5 102 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning a 5 4 7 7 Service Details GSFN DX4N DX4R FX Overview The DX4 N R 4 wire duplex signaling normal simplex and reverse simplex is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to
158. card is not inserted The Apply button is available only if the required state of MSC has been modified by the operator 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 39 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration E SeSe 5 3 2 1 8 Configure PTU The PTU Power Test Units circuit pack provides power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and 5V power to the MSC The corresponding window contains all information related to PTU pack It can be displayed even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the PTU Power Test Unit data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt PTU in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack PTU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View win dow The PTU window pops up NE Name ne5 Slot ptu 1 1 Inventory Data Card Type Serial Number Aparatus Code ECI CLEI il ICC o j Operation Protection Slot Required Figure 5 19 PTU Window AEM NB R1 5 5 40 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning ee Equipment Configuration The following table shows the view edit options of the PTU window
159. cess System A trademark is not treated as an acronym it is not spelled out or expanded Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark or trademark symbol the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 About this Document General Safety Information Typographical Con The following table gives examples of the typographical conventions used in this ventions chapter Table 0 5 Typographical Conventions Object Example Meaning Keyboard ReturnoraA Return or A key on the keyboard Shift Ctrl B Shift Ctrl and B key pressed simultaneously Esc A and B key pressed one after the other Pushbutton Apply Apply pushbutton in a window Menu File gt Exit Menu option Exit in File menu Objects in Designates the object Date in a window e g windows text field check box spin box etc 6 General Safety Information This section lists the safety information needed for the AnyMedia Access System for system turn up after installation has been completed operating provisioning and maintaining the system 6 1 General Notes on Safety This system has been developed in line with the present state of the art and fulfils the current national and international safety requirements It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from m
160. cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 2 page 5 25 AEM NB R1 5 5 22 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 363 211 402 Shelf View CTU Shelf Protection COMDAC Shelf Protection Application Pac MDS2 B Shelf View S PTU O N l Cc Figure 5 10 Menu Tree 5 3 2 1 1 Shelf View Window This window provides general inventory provisioning and alarm information through the circuit pack LEDs Each slot will show the card type inserted and its alarms when applicable If the slot is empty no card will be shown NE Linares Shelf View AnyMedia Access System ll ll comigicom2y ctu far far J Ap 3 J Ap 4 J Ap s far Jl AP 7 Jf Ap a J ar JAP 1 Of AP 141AP 1 29 AP 1 3 AP 1 4 AP 159AP 16 wno Figure 5 11 Shelf View Window Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window even when the card is not inserted cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 3 page 5 27 for IO DS1 Chapter 5 3 2 1 4 page 5 30 for COMDAC Chapter 5 3 2 1 5 page 5 32 for CTU Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 34 for Application Pack AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 23 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration The Shelf View window displays different colors for different tyoes of LEDs The following table describes the colors which will be used for each LED type inside every card type The table describes the color used when the LED is ON or is blinking If th
161. clude multiple OSs or NMSs as well as multiple GUI ac cess AEM NB R1 5 1 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee 5 Time and Date format Enables the user to use local preferred time and date format For example the local calendar must be supported or optional use of 24 hour clock ver sus a 12 hour clock m User friendly GUIs Provides a user friendly interface and hides the complexities of the infor mation models m Manageable Objects organized in a Hierarchy The configuration is implemented within a GUI hierarchy NE group level containing a number of NEs NE level starting with shelf view 1 3 1 5 Northbound Interface Tasks The Northbound Interface performs all the tasks needed to communicate to other OSs It allows external OSs access to the NEs managed by the AEM NB directly through TL1 commands via a pass through interface This access is controlled by the Northbound Interface until the OS is disconnected TL1 Pass Through The TL1 Pass Through Interface allows an external OS access to the NEs man Interface aged by the AEM NB directly through TL1 commands for provisioning testing and alarm purposes 1 3 1 6 Southbound Interface Tasks The Southbound Interface performs all the tasks needed to communicate to the NEs managed by the AEM NB It provides distributed CORBA access which in cludes implementation and translation of TL1 commands response and autono
162. compatibility with NE software releases and allows for upgrades to provide for OS compatibility This upgrade does not affect the services provided by NEs a Log Administration The logs are capable of being printed and visualized The system limits the size of the system logs It is possible to make backups of the logs and to re move them from the system There are logs for Actions Contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM NB and which imply changes in the AEM NB configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM NB print reports and backup amp restore i e all operations triggered by the user or the AEM NB and all subsequent actions The results of operations are also logged in the actions log System Internal Events Contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM NB or indicate errors that occurred in the AEM NB Autonomous Reports Contains all information useful for the equipment supplier about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from all managed NEs and which imply changes in the data base m Possibility to sort logs 2 Security m Possibility of creating deleting modifying AEM NB Users The AEM NB uses the security mechanisms provided by the SOLARIS Op erating System m AEM NB Security Privilege Levels Allows at least three priv
163. ct one or more tasks in the Tasks Tasks Assigned field and click Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 20 gt NOTE If the task View is removed also the tasks Acknowledge and Clear are not possible but not removed gt NOTE The administrator user group shall be assigned access permissions to all tasks and this access permissions shall not be modified Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 4 3 Delete User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user group from the AEM NB Be fore removing a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group is protected against deletions After a user group deletion all related information is removed from the AEM NB This does not include the contained users or their information but these users will lose the ability to invoke the applications tasks devices and maps for which the user group had permission Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 28 Access Bar AEM NB R1 5 4 26 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User Groups 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window po
164. d by SUN In order to successfully install the AEM NB R1 5 for the SUN Solaris installation the following has to be taken into account Disk partitioning HDD partitioning should include in addition to the standard UNIX entries e g usr var etc two entries for the AEM NB software and the trans action log cf Chapter 2 1 1 page 2 2 for size requirements Swap space In addition to the SUN recommendation at least double the size of the RAM memory should be used for swap 100MB per platform should be configured for OODBMS requirements NIS If more than one AEM NB platform is to be used NIS should be configured in the server so all the AEM NB clients will share the logins and password which are configured in the server tables All the users require a NOT null password in order to manage AEM NB NFS Network File Sharing is not required even when using a LAN but if NIS is used NFS allows operators to log in in any client platform having access to their home directories SUN patches All the Solaris patches described in the shopping list must be installed be fore AEM NB installation AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 2 1 Software Installation and Commissioning General EE m LAN amp WAN configuration E g default router to NEs etc must be available How to install SUN Solaris is described in SUN support SUN Solaris Installation Guide Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that
165. d with no cross connection to a logical TO id The Edit Logical TO button provides access to the Logical TO window where you will be able to edit the Logical TO pa rameters whenever this is possible or even remove the ex isting cross connection delete Logical T0 of the selected User Port from the list This button is enabled only if a physi cal port cross connected to a logical TO is selected The Delete Logical T0 button removes the cross connec tion selected in the list see above AEM NB R1 5 5 44 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use i gee then you want to add a Logical TO select a row in the Port Information list and press Add Logical TO The Logical TO List window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 7 page 5 90 you want to edit a Logical TO select a row in the Port Information list and press Edit Logical TO The Logical TO window pops up ct Chapter 5 4 8 page 5 112 you want to delete a cross connection select the desired Logical TO id in the Port Information list and press Re move Logical T0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following mes sage Logical TO will be deleted Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical TO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical TO will be delet
166. disabled Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 Z This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 7 for 2FXLS Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO Central Office to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote Alarm Indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Busy for 2FX AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 99 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning TF ee 5 4 7 3 Service Details GSFN 2RVO Overview The 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originate is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs Service Details Parameters Description RTLP Receive This slider can be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in Transmission dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain SONEN ela Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 TTLP Transmit This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or Transmission loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de Level Point fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 Z This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the
167. disrupted and certain inputs the ones causing the overload are ignored After clearing the overload sit uation the system is left in asynchronous state for those inputs that generated the overload Re synchronization of this input retrieves synchronization OS This is any operations system or Element Manager connected to the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager by some means of communication For the AnyMedia Element Manager R1 0 the communication method is TCP IP eee P Password PID This is always associated with a login UID PID is a case sensitive string containing 6 to 10 alphabetic numeric and symbolic characters where at least two characters are non alphabetic and one is symbolic PCM Highway The COMDAC pack is connected to each AP by the PCM highway which consists of two 4 096 Mbps serial links a 4 096 MHz clock and an 8 kHz sync signal The AnyMedia Access System uses two PCM highways between the COMDAC the IO_DS1s and each of the 16 AP slots Performance Management For receiving detecting time stamping analyzing displaying and storing performance data Plain Old Telephone Service POTS The conversional 2 wire analog subscriber service AEM NB R1 5 GL 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Glossary Platform The hardware on which any AnyMedia EM module server or client is running Platform Alarm This is an alarm related to the AnyMedia Element Manager application or its hardware software platform It usually re
168. dministration m User Administration and Profiling m Log Viewer m Alarm Viewer Configuration Manager BroadBand EM Each application is composed by one or more tasks The default user group as signment to the individual applications tasks is described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 26 1 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris AEM NB R1 5 1 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Introduction 1 2 4 System Working Modes The AEM NB can work in the following two modes m Stand alone Mode m Integrated Management Mode These modes are not mutually exclusive i e the AEM NB is always able to per form the element management tasks even while it is connected to any OS Stand Alone Mode In the stand alone mode the AEM NB performs the whole management of the NEs on its own The user is able to perform all management tasks via the GUI Figure 1 1 shows the system architecture in the stand alone mode Figure 1 1 Stand Alone Mode Integrated In the integrated management mode the AEM NB works as an integral part of the Management Mode customer s management network providing higher management systems OSs with services to manage NEs in their domains The AEM NB allows other OSs to pass provisioning testing or fault information to and from the NEs e g a fault management surveillance system can collect fault data using the pass through interface AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 5 Functional Description Intr
169. ds user attention since it may im pact the normal operations of any system under user responsibility e g AEM NB NE 6 6 2 Alarm Types Alarm Classifica Detected alarms are classified as one of the following tion m Platform Alarm Alarm related to the AnyMedia Element Manager application or its hard ware software platform Generated raised by any object of the AEM NB when it detects an abnormal condition to be reported to the user Information provided AEM NB Object Identifier Alarm Type Identifier Severity Service Affecting Occurrence Time m NE AM Alarms Generated raised by the NE AM Refer to Chapter 6 2 5 page 6 8 to see how the information comes from the NE AM to the AEM NB The NE AM alarms are classified in two groups Normal Alarms Data provided Access Identifier Condition Type Notification Code Service Affect ing Access Identifier Type Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Environment Alarms Data provided Access Identifier Alarm Type Notification Code Occurrence Date Occurrence Time For all alarm types several alarm data fields are conceptually the same although they convey different values For instance both Condition Type and Alarm Type refer to the type of alarm being raised cleared Battery on discharge Loss of frame AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 35 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms The following table maps all the equival
170. duling 6 28 6 4 4 Built in Self Test 6 29 6 4 5 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side 629d 6 5 Information Management and Maintenance 6 31 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States 6 31 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 VII rr Contents 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 6 31 6 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association 6 32 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after Association 6 33 6 5 5 Association Maintenance 6 34 6 6 Alarms 0 3 6 6 1 Overview 6 35 6 6 2 Alarm Types 6 35 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms 6 37 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms 6 37 A Data Communications Network DCN Configuration A 1 A 1 Overview A 1_ A 2 DCN Introduction A 1_ A 3 Terms Used in this Chapter A 2 A 4 NE Communication Capabilities A 2 A 5 AEM NB Communication Capabilities A 5 A 6 Sample DCN Configurations A 5 A 6 1 Remote Operations Channel Over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 5 A 6 2 X 25 DCN A 9 AB Abbreviations AB 1_ GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 AEM NB R1 5 VIII Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 T About this Document 1 Overview Purpose This User Service Manual USM provides the following information for Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband AEM NB Release 1 5 m A product overview and a functional product description System turn up procedures and system modifications m User Management Configuration management m Fault Management Maintenance The purpose of the USM
171. e a Alarm Colors The management system provides a color scheme based on alarm severi ties m Enable Disable of autonomous Alarms on an NE Basis Fault Localization Provides fault localization across all NEs under the AEM NB control The COMDAC LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the system The indi vidual plug in unit LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the plug in unit Fault localization is performed at AP level m NE Alarm Log Handling The AEM NB is able to retrieve the NE alarm log via the cut through inter face AEM NB R1 5 1 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee Performance The Performance Management provides the following functionality features Management m Handling of Performance Records Records can be displayed printed and stored in a user defined file Test The Test Management provides the following functionality features Management m Port Test via cut through It is possible to request a test for a particular port on a specific application pack m Application Pack Card Test lt is possible to start a series of self diagnostic routines for all port circuits on a specified Application Pack plus its common circuitry m Standby Card Test Scheduling via cut through It is possible to schedule a test to perform a COMDAC side switch or off line diagnostic for the standby COMDAC or the protection a Built in Self Test Each NE performs
172. e 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE NVDS Backup via Menu bar The NVDS Backup window pops up HE Name nes Backup Information Filename Figure 5 45 NVDS Backup Window The Filename list displays all file names available for a backup 3 Select the file in the list of which you wish to make a backup The corre sponding file will be displayed in the Filename field and can be edited 4 Click on OK this command button is available only after having selected the file name The status bar shows the progress of the operation AEM NB R1 5 5 118 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS a SeS 5 6 2 Data Restore Complete the following procedure to initiate data Restoration Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE NVDS Restore via Menu bar A Warning win dow pops up NE NVDS Restore may be service affecting Do you want to continue 3 Press Yes to confirm this message The NVDS Restore window pops up NE Name nes Restore Information Filename Figure 5 46 NVDS Restore Window The Filename list displays all backup file names 4 Select a desired file in the list The corresponding file will be displayed in the Filename field and can be edited 5 Click on OK this command button is available only after having selected the file name An n Progress w
173. e Domain Name Change Domain Description Adding Controlled Objects 363 211 402 4 Select one domain in the Domain Name field and click Open The Domain Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected domain Domain Profile Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned Type Value fo User Groups User Groups Net Assigned Assigned Administrator Maintenance Monitoring NE Figure 4 16 Window Domain Profile To change the domain name enter the new name in the Domain Name field 3 to 30 characters Any characters are allowed To change the domain description enter the new information in the Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign further controlled objects to the selected domain select one or more controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 4 13 User Management Domains Removing To remove assigned controlled objects from the selected domain select one or Controlled Objects more controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Adding To give further user groups access to the selected domain select one or more User Groups user groups in the User Grou
174. e LED is OFF the color black is used Circuit Pack Meanings lO DS1 FLT m Lit during circuit pack failure m Flashes when the circuit pack executes off line self test ACT ACT green green Lit when the circuit pack is service active CLF1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 CLF3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 CLF4 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 4 m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes during software download and turnup Indicates that this COMDAC is active cht Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical COMDAC Lit when the highest severity alarm is major Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is near end yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is far end m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes on turnup ACT fgreen green Lit when a test is in progress MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm in puts is active For future use AllApplication FLT m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack PACKS E rag during software download and turn AEM NB R1 5 5 24 Issue2 09 99
175. e are still jobs running You have running jobs Do you want to continue You have to decide whether to continue or wait until the job is finished 5 2 4 Cursor Menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a Menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all dialogue boxes The functions which can be executed using this cursor menu depend on the application of the respective dialogue box Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure ul Press and hold down the right mouse button 2 Drag the cursor onto the desired menu option Release the right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and release the right mouse button 5 2 4 1 Structure and Cursor Menus In the following table the last column contains the cursor menus It also shows in parenthesis the name of the window launched if the name of the cursor menu en try and the name of the window are not the same Cursor menu entries and asso Browser entries ciated windows All Create NE NE Information All gt NE NE Information Cut Through Delete NE All gt NE gt Shelf Shelf View Protection Program Copy All gt NE gt Shelf gt 1 O
176. e carried out All client applica tions continue working except for those parts involving NEs Restart of Server If a server application crashes the AEM NB tries to start up this server application Applications one time automatically If the server application start up mechanism fails and it is a level 2 application it remains stopped If it is a level 1 application the whole sys tem is shutted down and restarted all running applications at that moment are shutted down and restarted 3 4 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applica tions via GUI Introduction The System Administration function of the Access Bar allows to start up or shut down server applications manually and to monitor the state of each application Only the administrator has access to this function The System Administration window is shown below AEM NB R1 5 3 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown i system Administration Applications Stepped Running System Core Configuration Management Alarm Viewer MEM Figure 3 9 System Administration Stopped Running The System Administration window displays two lists Stopped and Running Lists The Stopped list contains all applications which are not running The Running list contains all running applications You can stop running or start stopped applica tions The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the System Administ
177. e frame to shift and resize the window By ners dragging the window corners the window size may be modified to both limiting sides at the same time Title bar The title bar informs you about the function of the window Drag the title bar to shift the window on the screen Minimize button If you click on the minimize button the window will be displayed in its minimum size i e it will appear as an icon on the screen though the process represented by the window will continue running AEM NB R1 5 3 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows Figure 3 4 Controls in a Window Window Part Function Horizontal scroll Use the horizontal scroll bar and the slider to shift the visible window section to the bar left or right Small step to the left or right Click on the left or right scroll bar arrow m Page left or right Click on the scroll bar to the left or right of the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider horizontally until the desired window section becomes visible Vertical scroll bar Use the vertical scroll bar to shift the currently visible window section up or down m Small step up or down Click on the top or bottom scroll bar arrow m Page up or down Click on the scroll bar section above or below the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider up or down until the desired window section becomes visible Maximize
178. e or type n or q and press Re turn to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode I Client lt Client side installation gt 2 Server lt Server side installation gt Enter selection q AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 7 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure gt NOTE Type to get help type to repeat the prompt and type q to exit from the installation 4 Type 2 and press Return Transferring lt LULUMRT gt package instance Transferring lt LuURWRT gt package instance Transferring lt LuOX23RT gt package instance Transferring lt LUOXNS gt package instance Transferring lt LuOXTKRT gt package instance Transferring lt LuOSRT gt package instance LUMOS Build 5 In Processing package instance lt LULUMRT gt from stallation lt tmp lucent_pkg 1 gt Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris Build 5 run time OK No previous package LuLUMRT have been found Enter install directory opt lucent LUMOS q s Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Checking your DNS domain name done What is your DNS domain name default es lu cent com q 6 Type your DNS domain name and press Return press Return to se lect default A
179. e protection scheme is Simplex If both COMDACs are present Duplex is the value shown Only in this case Duplex configuration is the Protection Switch pane available see below COMDAC Infor COMDAC 1 2 This non editable fields display the current mation COMDAC working state The following values are possible Working Standby and Not Equipped if there is no COM DAC inserted in the corresponding slot SW Version Shows the SW Version for the respective COMDAC Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching to be specified Switch Only the working COMDAC is inhibited With the Forced Switch request the working COMDAC be comes standby and vice versa Inhibited Switch request is disabled if the current protection status is Forced Forced Switch request is disabled if the current protection status is Inhibit Therefore before you can switch from Forced Switch to Protection to Inhibit or vice versa you have to Clear the current protection Protection This field displays the current protection mode which will be Mode updated as a result of a protection switch Possible values Clear or Freeze 2 Use the Radio buttons in field Protection Switch to switch the protection Clear or Forced Switch to Protection or Inhibit 3 Press Apply to confirm A Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The info
180. e required state of CTU has been modified by the operator 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 33 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Le 5 3 2 1 6 Configure Application Pack The APs Application Packs provide the line side interface functionality that pro vide service to end users The corresponding window contain all information related to the AP It can be dis played even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the Application Pack data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack AP in Shelf View window The Application Pack window pops up Application Pack NE Name Linares Slot Number ap 1 10 Inventory Data Card Type Serial Number Aparatus Code ICC LEI Et Operation amp Protectian J Slot Required Port Information Physical For ID VRTA E ID Logical TO ID Figure 5 17 Application Pack Window AEM NB R1 5 5 34 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nn The following table shows the view edit op
181. eck box Slot Required 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 5 3 2 7 Protection Switching General Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System when a fault is detected NE entities that are involved in carrying service to a large number of end users are generally required to be protected with a redundant unit However the NE provides customer options to have none or some entities protected with redundant units These entities can be either 1 1 or 1 N protected For 1 1 protected entities one of them serves as the active or pri mary unit and the other serves as a protection or standby unit For 1 N protected entities one entity serves as the protection or standby unit for all N active units If an active unit fails the failure is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the protection unit The protection switching can also be requested on demand Revertive non re Protection switching can be revertive or non revertive Revertive protection switch vertive ing implies that the active and standby units will return to their original configura tion once the failure causing the protection switch has been repaired Non rever tive switching does not return the entities to their original configuration With non revertive switching the repaired unit becomes the new standby unit AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 59
182. ed Ok to proceed 4 If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list Table 5 2 CU Cards Possible Values SPQ454 SPQ454 SAC1BGOAAB MCU 5205 MCU 5205 t b d MCU 5405 MCU 5405 t b d Card Type CLEI AUA293 5SC4PTOCAA SPQ429 SPQ429 SAC1AKOAAA SPQ442 SAC1AHOAAA AUA41B 5SC3HJEAAA AUA45B 5SCUUJ5AAB AUA75 5SC1FF2AXX SPQ452 5SCTFFGAAB AUA200 5SCTBODAAA SPQ444 SAC1BFOAAB eee AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 45 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ELE 5 3 2 2 NE Synchronization 5 3 2 2 1 Configuration Information Synchronization Overview The possibility exists for the AEM NB database to become inconsistent with the information stored locally in the NE Non Volatile Data Storage A database re synchronization capability provides a mechanism for the AEM NB database to be made consistent synchronized with the locally stored NE information Two NE configuration data synchronization states can be identified m Sync The AEM NB database is consistent with the locally stored NE infor mation and all the autonomous messages concerning configuration changes are enabled DB changes switch reports and some events of type protection switches lockout and loop back m Async The AEM NB database and the NE configuration data are out of synchronization and or configurat
183. ed alarms their status will Chapter 6 3 5 change to cleared page 6 21 Table 6 8 Help Menu Index Display the index help allowing the user to Chapter 6 3 4 4 navigate through the AEM NB help informa page 6 21 tion On window Display the help information of the window where the user is currently working AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 13 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring 6 3 3 2 Toolbar The toolbar contains often used functions and consists of four buttons Table 6 9 Toolbar Function Meaning Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms Their status im vy mediately changes to acknowledged The ao User_Ack is set to the login of the user who has acknowledged the alarm Clear Clear all selected alarms Their status immedi ately changes to cleared clear Reload Reload the actual alarms states into the table filar Only alarms which match the filter criteria are in ee cluded 7 a Print 5 Open a window for printing out all alarm items i displayed in the currently displayed table cf Print Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 6 3 3 3 General Information Section The first section is a frame titled General Information this frame includes controls showing information about the number of alarms of each alarm severity in the do main where the user is working m Critical Displays the number of critical CR alarms Major Displays the number of major MJ alarms m Minor
184. ed from your system The deinstallation re moves all AEM NB related items databases 3rd party software etc which have been installed at the time when AEM NB was installed from your system Commands for The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win Deinstallation dow to deinstall AEM NB from your system Log in as root to execute these com mands Table 3 10 Commands for Deinstallation If you want to Type in a terminal window remove the server package pkgrm LuANY10S remove the client package pkgrm LuANY10C remove third party software pkgrm LuRWRT For details about the above commands please refer to Chapter 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers package Chapter 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyMedia Client package and Chapter 2 2 4 3 Remove Third Party packages AEM NB R1 5 3 20 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Print out Reports 3 5 Print out Reports General The Print Dialog is used from any application within AEM NB to generate an out put of data It pops up when you press Print in a window System Details for If the Unix command 1p does not exist or is not configured on your system the Printing AEM NB software will not be able to print This is because the print out is first con verted to PostScript format and then piped to the Unix command lp d printer_name where printer_name is replaced by the value en tered in the Printer field of the Print Dialog Figure 3 10 shows an
185. ed in the directory SANYMEDIAPATH cfg The system variables can be changed by editing their values in this file with a text editor The changes take effect after the system is restarted The following table shows selected variable names their meaning and default val ues The locations of the directories are relative to the main installation directory of the AEM NB Table 3 27 System Variables and their Default Values System Property Variable Name Default Value Location of alarm database AM databaseLocation AM db Location of configuration management data CM databaseLocation CM db base Location of NE management database NEM databaseLocation NEM db Location of security database OAM security databaseLocation Security db Location of Non volatile Data Storage CM directoryNVDS CM nefiles NVDS NVDS Location of log files OAM log directoryCurrentLogs log Minimum number of days incl current day OAM log minimumDaysKept in the log Maximum size of all logged data OAM log maximumTotalLogSize 15 Stop OrbixMT 3rd party software when the Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbixMT true AEM NB goes down Stop OrbixNames 3rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbixNames true the AEM NB goes down Stop OrbixTalk 3rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbix Talk true the AEM NB goes down Stop ObjectStore 3rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtObjectStore true the AEM NB goes down 3 38 Issue 2 09 99 J
186. ed in the plug In Operation amp This field is described in Chapter 5 3 2 6 page 5 58 Protection Ongoing Tasks Copy Mem in Progress Sw Download in Progress These check boxes indicate operations in progress which can take a long time and must be known by the opera tor They will be refreshed when the window Is launched or when refreshing the whole window AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 31 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration BE SeSe 5 3 2 1 5 Configure CTU The CTU Craft Test Unit circuit pack provides both channel testing support and a termination for local operations administration maintenance and provisioning This corresponding window contains all information related to the CTU It can be displayed even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CTU data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt CTU in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack CTU in Shelf View window The CTU window pops up o wo O NE Mame Linares Slot ctu 1 Inventory Data Card Type CTU serial Number 980010123576 aratus Code OTF100 IOC 1 1 p CLEI C1 DHOCAA ECI 220868 Operation F rotection M Slot Required Pry Figure 5 16 CTU
187. eld to indicate the position where text is to be inserted The clock cursor indicates that in the window where the cursor is positioned a GO process requiring a lot of processing time is running and no mouse or keyboard inputs are possible 3 3 4 Basics on Windows The window which contains the input focus evaluates all keyboard and mouse in puts The window containing the input focus is easy to distinguish from other win dows opened on the screen by the different colour of its window frame Use the mouse to direct the input focus to a defined window Click on a position within the window or place the cursor on the window The window shown in Figure 3 3 labels the different window controls which allow the user to change the aspect of the window on the screen and the process repre sented by the window AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 7 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows ee Window menu button Title bar Minimize button Maximize button Text Editor unnamed File Edit Search Format Menu bar Slider Window frame with Slider Horizontal scroll bar Vertical scroll bar resize corners Figure 3 3 Specimen Window and Window Controls The individual window controls shown in Figure 3 3 are Figure 3 4 Controls ina Window Window Part Function Window frame The frame delimits the window on the screen and its colour indicates whether this with resize cor window contains the input focus Drag th
188. eleases many DCN configurations and protocol profiles can be used according to the network operators needs and scenarios Two sample DCN scenarios are given at the end of this chapter A 3 Terms Used in this Chapter Data Communica tions Network Semi Permanent Leased Line Remote Operations Channel Router Bridge The Data Communications Network DCN consists of the communication media and the interconnected devices which are used to exchange management infor mation between the AEM NB the NEs and other management systems A Semi Permanent Leased Line SPLL is a service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is the re sponsible for the set up of this service The Remote Operations Channel ROC is a bearer channel that conveys man agement information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is expected to be used when the system is installed at locations where no Ethernet Local Area Network LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists A router is a network layer device that forwards packets from one network to an other based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is on another port of the router The router can keep data traffic certain parts of a LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for
189. elected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 9 5 to 7 dB Possible values Black White Default Black RCV This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Sealing Current When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set 5 4 7 16 Overview of Application Packs and GSFNs Overview The following table provides an overview of the general service functions and the compatible Applications Packs channel units GSFN Compatible AP CU DFLT LPA300 LPA350 LPA380 2LS LPASOO LPA350 LPA380 2GS LPA350 LPA380 2FX LPA350 LPA380 AEM NB R1 5 5 110 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning as 363 211 402 GSFN Compatible AP CU 2FXLS LPA350 LPA380 2RVO LPA350 LPA380 2NOS LPA350 LPA380 ISDN LPU116 COIN LPA350 lines 1 16 only 4DO ROC DATA AUA200 AUA232 EBS SPQ429 AC LR AUA45B AUA75 NO1 NO2 MCU5205 MCU5405 BRI AUA293 TO SPQ442 DPT SPQ442 DX4 N R AUA41B FX O P 1 2 3 5 SPQ444 FX S 1 1 2 3 5 AUA41B EM4 C H SPQ454 PLR 1 2 SPQ454 ETO4 AUA41B FXO SPQ442 OCU 1 2 3 SPQ452 SW56 SPQ452 TD O S A B C D SPQ444 TO4 AUA41B AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 111 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning E
190. elfProtection Figure 5 27 Shelf Protection Window Tab IO DS1 This window provides IO DS1 protection information It also provides the mechanisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches AEM NB R1 5 5 64 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 3 Use the following table to define the IO DS1 Protection Switch Parameters Buttons Description Protection Displays the protection scheme used in the NE for IO DS1 Scheme Possible values Enable 1O DS1 p present or Disable no lO DS1 p Only in the case of protection scheme Enable the Protection Switch pane is available Protection The IO DS1 option menu shows all O DS1s present or ab Switching sent in the NE Selecting one of these IO DS1 will provoke population of the Active Switch Request and Protection State read only fields see below The possible values for Active Switch Request are m Clear No active switch in effect Any protection switch is allowed for the specified IO DS1 Lockout If this is selected for the protection IO DS1 access to the protection pack for the group is not al lowed When applied to a service IO DS1 access to the protection pack is prevented No protection switches will be done on the specified service slot until the switch is reset Only Clear Protection Switch will be allowed Forced Switch to Protection Applicable to O DS1 only No
191. ement Provisioning Service Provisioning ELE 5 4 7 1 Service Details GSFN DFLT Overview The DFLT Default POTS SPOTS service is primarily applicable to TR 08 appli cations Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full When a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Loss Mode Use this option menu to specify whether the Application Pack will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to con trol the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescription set values Possible values 2 5 Auto Default Auto 5 4 7 2 Service Details GSFN 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX Overview The 2LS 2 wire loop start service with enhanced transmission and signaling pro visioning options is applicable to the POTS32 LPA300 PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs The 2GS 2 wire ground start service with enhanced transmission and signaling provisioning options is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs The 2FXLS 2 wire FX loop start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs AEM NB R1 5 5 98 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning as The 2FX 2 wire FX ground start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full W
192. en a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes during software download and turnup MSC red Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack eto m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected PT red Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack Lit when a channel served by the PTU is under test Audible Indication The user is warned by an audible indication if a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is reported to the AEM NB Only alarms from NEs within the user domain will be indicated AEM NB R1 5 6 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Alarm Information Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Clearance The alarm severity which causes audible alarm notification is configurable via the system variables in the file SANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini Table 6 3 Configure Audible Notification System Variable Severity Possible States AUDI_CRITICAL_ALARM_SEV Critical On Off default ON AUDI_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV Major On Off default OFF AUDI_MINOR_ALARM_SEV Minor On Off default OFF AUDI_INFO_ALARM_SEV Information On Off default OFF For alarm notification see aslo Chapter 3 2 3 1 By default the AEM NB causes an audible alarm indication every time a new crit ical alarm is reported to the AEM NB For more information on the reported alarm open the Alarm Viewer c
193. en offering a range of functions and in formation A function is initiated by clicking the respective area of the workspace manager In Figure 3 6 only an example of the workspace manager is given as the entries are configurable General Personal Applications Lock Screen Log Out e g ian Fa oo Noy a O is Calendar Editor Other Workspaces Printer Tools Trash Can Clock File Manager Mailtool Workspace Solaris Help Configuration Figure 3 6 Workspace Manager For a detailed description of the offered functions please refer to your Solaris Functions User s Guide and Solaris Common Desktop Environment User s Guide 3 3 9 Workspace Menu General The workspace menu opens when you click with the right mouse button on the background of the workspace Workspace Menu Programs Shuttle Up Shuttle Down Refresh Minimize Restore Front Panel Restart Workspace Manager Log out Figure 3 7 Workspace Menu AEM NB R1 5 3 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows i oI Workspace Menu The workspace menu provides the functions listed in the following table Functions Table 3 4 Menu Items of the Workspace Menu Menu Item Function Programs A submenu offering several programs Shuffle Up If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Up brings the window from the very bot tom to the top of the pile Shuffle Down If
194. ent fields to general names that uniquely identify a concept independently of the alarm type Table 6 13 General Alarm Fields General Name NE Environment Alarm Object_ld Access Identifier Severity Notification Code Date_First_Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time a Time and date YYYY MM DD HH MM SS b Only time HH MM SS c Only date MM DD Alarm Severities For each alarm one of the following alarm severities is defined m Critical CR m Major MJ m Minor MN m Information IN only applicable for platform alarms Alarm Identifica The multiple key that uniquely identifies an alarm is tion Host Identifier Identifies where the alarm comes from If it comes from an NE then this identifier is the NE name If the alarm is reported by the AEM NB the host identifier is EM For association alarms the host identifier is NE_name m System Object Identifier Identifies the alarm affected object within the host which is identified by the host identifier For association alarms the system object identifier is ASSOC m General Alarm Identifier Unique identifier within each type of alarm In order to ease possible communication between different users an index num ber is provided as a temporal alarm identification It is temporal because the index number will be used as a circular sequence the maximum sequence number is 100 000 It is provided only for user convenience It will not be used to identify an alarm
195. enu Filters in the general information section ctf Chapter 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 2 Select the NE or the AEM NB for which the alarms are to be displayed A window Figure 6 7 page 6 21 is displayed for selecting one or more NEs and or the AEM NB 3 Either click on OK or Cancel AEM NB R1 5 6 20 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring OK Updates the Alarm Viewer showing only the alarm information of the pre selected NE NEs or AEM NB Cancel Closes this window and cancels the operation Hosts of user domain Cancel Figure 6 7 NE Selection Window 6 3 4 4 Help Help is provided for every window The help text describes the purpose of the win dow how to use it and a description of each field of the window is given In the Menu Bar of each AEM NB application there are two help options m Index Displays the help index allowing the user to navigate through the AEM NB help information m On window Displays the help information of the window where the user is currently working 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions Summary The Alarm Viewer provides the user with different functions for managing alarm information m Reload alarms m Acknowledge alarms The user can acknowledge one more or all reported alarms The AEM NB allows different users to acknowledge the same alarm The name of the last user who has acknowledged the alarm is stored AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue
196. er Transmitter UAS Unassigned UEQ Unequipped UI User Interface UID User Id UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply UX Unix V VB Virtual Bank VC Virtual Connection VE Voice Frequency VFDE Voice Frequency Data Enhancement AEM NB R1 5 AB 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Abbreviations VRT Virtual Remote Terminal W WAN Wide Area Network X XO Crystal Oscillator Y YEL Yellow Alarm c Z ZCS Zero Code Suppression ZS Zero Suppression AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 AB 11 Abbreviations ee AEM NB R1 5 AB 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 a Glossary 10Base T This is a physical interface used for high speed Ethernet connection It uses twisted pair cables A a wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the tip wire AEM NB AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services It may be also named simply AEM NB in some parts of the document Alarm Any condition that needs operator attention since it may impact the normal operations of any system under opera tor responsibility e g Element Manager Network Element AMS Alarm Management Subsystem AnyMedia Access System This is also referred to as the Network Element or just the NE AnyMedia NE AnyMedia Network Element for Narrow Band Services It is the Network Element to which the DCN defined in this document is related Also known as FAST or AMAS AO Auton
197. er if the participant is connected to another port of the router With a router data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control S Security Management This restricts access based upon the establishment of log in procedures and an associated set of passwords Screen locks are used as well User access is based upon domain partitioning Controls the access to the data and capabilities inherent within a fixed partition of the network including unbundling Server A network element that waits for requests from clients to perform specific tasks This is the function performed by the AnyMedia Access System Server Application This is a set of server processes that perform a certain function AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 GL 9 Glossary he Server Host This is the machine where the system server modules are installed Server Module This is the module that provides a subset of the system services Service This is a piece of functionality provided by a server module ServiceState of an object or entity This represents the current availability status of an associated resource or service in the NE from the management point of view e g memory administration maintenance Session This is the active communication link between a client in the context of this d
198. ering Number The ordering number for the AEM NB User Service Manual is 363 211 402 Order Procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and or to request placement on the standing order list send or call in an order as follows Telephone Order Monday through Mail Order Friday Lucent Technologies Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST FAX from USA Attention Priscilla Stanley 1 800 566 9568 email pfstanley lucent com FAX Worldwide 2855 N Franklin Road P O Box 19901 1 317 322 6699 USA Indianapolis IN 46219 Customer Information Center a For ordering a purchase order number or charge card number is required with all orders Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies 1 Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AEM NB R1 5 XVI Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 About this Document How to Comment on This B SS One time Orders One time orders include the contents for the current document issue in effect at the time of order Standing Orders You may request an update on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribu tion for all reissues of the document 9 How to Comment on This Document Document Com The first sheet in this manual after the title page is the feedback form How Are ment Procedure We Doing Please use this form to fax your comments and suggestions concern
199. erver without Clients and with external OS WAN AEM NB server connected to the NEs using a LAN and connected to one or more external OSs using a WAN link OSs Servers e g TNMServer et Bridge Router WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM TCP IP PPP Be ges oo ee NS N T e ae 7 Modem oe m ISDN Network Adapter Bridge Router SS TCP IP Hub C a a TCP IP LAN AEM NB Server NE eese jses NE _ NE Figure 1 11 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 29 Functional Description Network Configuration E SeSe 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and ex ternal OS WAN AEM NB server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a WAN link and connected to one ore more external OSs using a LAN connection ya Lae Ee i o LES a lient CI ient N P g Pea 4 ms S p Bridge Router Modem o ISDN Network Adapter Zeon oe TCP IP PP
200. ess Return Code for the representation of names of coun tries Refer to ISO 3166 for more information AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 1 DK DENMARK 2 DE GERMANY 3 FR FRANCE 4 IT ITALY 5 CN CHINA 6 ES SPAIN 7 GB UNITED KINGDOM 8 US UNITED STATES Enter selection q 76 Type your country code and press Return Code for the representation of names of Time Zones 1 GMT 0 Greenwich Mean Time 2 ECT 1 European Central Time 3 EET 2 Eastern European Time 4 ART 2 Arabic Egypt Standard Time 5 EAT 3 Eastern African Time 6 MET 3 5 Middle East Time 7 NET 4 Near East Time 8 PLT 5 Pakistan Lahore Time 9 IST 5 5 India Standard Time 10 BST 6 Bangladesh Standard Time 21 more menu choices to follow lt RETURN gt for more choices lt CTRL D gt to stop display Enter selection q 77 Type the desired time zone and press Return gt NOTE The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia Client GUI LUMOS Network Element and OS Using lt gt as the package base directory AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 35 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with pack
201. est Test Request Each NE performs a built in self test of plug in circuit packs periodically gt NOTE The built in self test is not requested from the AEM NB it will be always started from the NE Procedure If a failure occurs the NE will raise an alarm REPT ALM which contains the AID of the failed pack plug in The alarm is then visible in the Alarm Viewer of the AEM NB For more information about possible alarms see Chapter 6 6 4 page 6 37 describes AEM NB alarms or refer to the AMAS R1 2 network ele ments documentation describes NE alarms 6 4 5 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side Procedure It is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders Proceed as follows to set clear DS1 loopbacks Step Procedure You have the following options to set clear a loopback a Via the Network Browser and the Menu Bar 1 Select the DS1 you intend to set clear a loopback in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt IO DS1 gt Physical DS1 2 Select Equipment gt Loopback from the menu bar or Loopback from the cursor menu The Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window pops up Check that the dis plays in the NE Name and DS1 fields are correct 3 Click Physical DS1 Data The Loopback field displays the current loopback state Clear or Set 4 Click Label to change the loopback state Depending on the loopback state reflected this command button displays the possible operation Clear if the loopback is
202. etwork DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations A 6 2 4 Element Manager Client Configuration The element manager client configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 4 page A 8 A 6 2 5 Transport Elements Configuration If the transport is achieved by means of an X 25 Public Data Network PDN then X 25 permanent virtual circuits or switched virtual circuits must be provisioned be tween routers on both sides before the AEM NB and NEs are able to exchange management information If PVCs are used they may be established by the PDN operator If SVCs are used the routers on AEM NB and NE sides are responsible for establishing e g for routing IP packets and releasing the connections e g by timeouts It is neces sary to assign the address of the router before X 25 WAN can be used Ngee TCP IP gt 2a lt TCP IP Bridge Router OEP He EIA 232D m 5 7 ISDN ATM SONET SDH IP over X 25 PSTN etc Bridge Router lt 4 DTE ElA 232D NEs LAN TCP IP 10BaseT Hub NEs LAN TTH NEe o o TITTIE NE NE eepe ls jefe ls e NE NE Figure A 6 X 25 Communication with Remote NEs AEM NB R1 5 363 211
203. eview Prints a screenshot of the lists in the window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 File gt Exit Closes all windows of this application Help gt On Window Displays online help for this window Help gt Index Displays online help index AEM NB R1 5 3 16 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 4 Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 4 1 General on Applications Definitions The following tables gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 7 Definitions for Applications Term Meaning Server application Set of server processes that perform a certain functional ity Server applications provide services for client applica tions Client application Set of processes that use the services provided by the server applications e g GUI and Northbound users Level 1 or core The minimum set of server applications that have to run applications together to provide the minimum functionality of the AEM NB These applications must run to allow the Level 2 Ap plication to be started up These applications are shown as only one running application If this group is shut down the AEM NB is shut down Level 2 applications The server applications that can be started up and shut down individually without affecting the functioning of other applications However there are interdependences be tween Level 2 applications so that the shut down of one may affect the services of others
204. example of the Print Dialog Frint Dialog Print title Copies tf Print to Printer lf _ File Eanner Page Title title Print Command Options Paper Size Orientation Letter Executive Portrait J Legal Be Ad Landscape Print Cancel Figure 3 10 Print Dialog Actions in Print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Print Dia Dialog log Table 3 11 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then print multiple copies enter the number of copies in Copies print to a printer enter the name of the printer in Printer print to a file enter the name of the file in File have a title over the printed pages enter the title in Banner Page Title AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 21 System Management ee Table 3 11 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then Print out Reports apply UNIX print options enter the options in Print Command Options select the paper size click one of the radio buttons below Paper Size select the orientation of the print out click one of the radio buttons below Orientation start printing and close the window click on Print close the print window without printing click on Cancel After you confirmed your settings with Print the Print Preview window is opened cf Figure 3 11 SOB 2 close Thu 3k E Thu JELE Thu J trE Thu J trE Thu J trE Thu Jk E Thu 2k E Thu Jk E Thu 3 kE Thu JE
205. f Chapter 6 3 page 6 10 Acknowledging alarms is described in Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Clearing alarms is described in Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data Alarm Retrieval User Domains 363 211 402 The user can select lists of alarms filtered by several fields Therefore the user specifies a selection criterion cf Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 that is taken by the AMS to make the appropriate filters For instance an user can request all the crit ical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affect ing and are raised at the same time The number of alarms stored in the alarm database can be retrieved too The to tal number of alarms can be retrieved as well as the number of alarms per severity number of critical alarms major minor and information The user domain is the list of NEs and or the AEM NB the user can manage The user domains are applicable in the AMS to the alarm retrieval operations and to the alarm notification Each user can only request alarms and the number of alarms that are in the user s domain The client and server security filters fill in this information When the alarm retrieval operation arrives at the alarm server in addition to the normal input data it also contains the user domain information added by the user interface AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 6 7 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management E SeSe
206. fers to an Element Manager function or hardware software platform object Port This is circuitry built on an AP to provide an interface for subscribers Note that more than one port can be housed on an AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Port Test Also called circuit test Verifies the ability of an AP port to provide proper transmission and signaling It is the test ing of the port hardware The functions of the port test rather depend on the hardware function of the circuit e g POTS pulse metering ISDN These tests are performed on each AP using part of their self test capabilities R RDT This refers to the physical Remote Digital Terminal A Remote Digital Terminal is a physical section of the NE that interfaces to the LDS at DS1 rate Response Time The real elapsed time between detectable start of an action and its completion Restore The process of copying backup files from removable media to a working directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged ROC Remote Operations Channel The bearer channel that conveys management information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is in tended to be used when the system is installed at locations where no local Ethernet LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists Router A network layer device that forwards packets from one network to another based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the rout
207. figuration If you select No the creation of the NE is rejected Otherwise the Domain Selection window is activated The window remains on the screen until you make a decision gt NOTE 6 Enter the IP Address and TID Target ID the name of the NE to which the connection is addressed of the new NE in the field Communications Info IP Address format xxx xxx xxx xxx where x is a numeric 0 9 the TID has a range from 1 to 20 characters gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is broken 7 Press Apply to confirm 8 Enter the Login and Password in the Authentication pane gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is broken 9 Press Apply to confirm gt NOTE Now the connection can be established The label button in the field Con nection displays Connect 10 Press Connect to establish the connection If all entries were correct the connection will be established and the new NE can be displayed on the Network Browser Wrong entries incorrect login or password will result in an error mes sage gt NOTE To establish the connection to the created NE first you have to enter the ap propriate data in the fields Communications Info and Authentication in the NE Name Information window After that it is possible to establish the connection by pressing Connection Depending on the Connection State this Labe
208. files Archiving is possible for AEM NB log files The restore functions allow you to restore file systems by copying reasonably cur rent backup files from removable media to a working directory 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Data bases Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 13 Definitions Term Meaning Backup process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption Archive process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up Restore process of copying backup files from removable media to a work ing directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged Full Backup copies a complete file system or directory AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 23 System Management Backup and Restore ee Table 3 13 Definitions Term Meaning Incremental copies new files and files that have changed since a previous Backup backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incre mental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level On line backups performed on user demand Backup Off line backups performed automatically via any scheduling mecha Backup nisms e g cron file AEM NB Data The AEM NB database can
209. firm 5 3 2 5 Set Date and Time Overview A function required by the AEM NB is provisioning the date and time of the man aged NEs i e the operator is able to set the NE Date amp Time Also it is possible for the AEM NB to retrieve the date and time of any NE AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 55 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration E SeSe Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the date and time Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Date amp Time this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time NE Details NE View Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing source Control Date amp Time Current Date Time Get Date Apply Close Figure 5 24 Date amp Time Window This tab provides you with the facilities needed to obtain the current date and time used in the NE as well as to change them Two panes are shown Current and New Current The current date and time used in the NE is displayed Use the Get button to retrieve the data from the NE AEM NB R1 5 5 56 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Conf
210. for transmission only This is a Z interface normally used for services other than telephony e g data transmission This type of Z inter face does not support DC feeding and does not support out band signaling This interface can support Analog Leased Line ALL service AEM NB R1 5 GL 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Index A Access bar 3 4 Access protection 1 26 Access to the testroutines 6 23 Actions 1 12 3 32 AEM external system LAN interface A 5_ AEM NB protocol profiles A 5 Alarm log 1 23 monitoring 1 21 Classification 6 35_ Alarm counter 3 4 Alarm data synchronization 6 33 Alarm management 3 18 Alarm Notification icon 3 4 Alarm Reporting 6 3 Alarm Severities 6 36 Alarm Viewer Alarm Table 6 15 General Information 6 14 Menu Bar 6 12 System management functions 6 18 Toolbar 6 14 Alarm viewer Starting 6 10 Alarms Alarm classification 6 35 Reporting via EM 6 3 Alternate key 3 6 AMAS R1 2 shelf 5 1 AP card test 6 26 AP card test result 6 27 Applications start 3 4 Apply button 3 15 Archive database 3 23 Archive command 3 26 Assign controlled objects to domains 4 13 user groups access to applications 4 25 user groups access to domains 4 25 user groups access to tasks 4 25 users to user groups 4 6 Association NE AEM 6 34 Association state 6 34 Authentication 5 19 Autonomous Reports 1 12 3 32 Available Domains 5 18 363 211 402 B Backspace key 3 6 Backup command 3 26
211. fully Select a desired file in the Download Information list The corresponding file will be displayed in the Filename field Click on OK A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the AEM NB starts the download procedure An In Progress window pops up showing the following message SW Download to lt NE Name gt in progress gt NOTE 09 99 The n Progress window is a dialog window with progress indicator and cancel option that will be displayed any time there is a long duration task being performed such as SW Download The following figure shows an ex ample AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning NE Software Upgrade In Progress AP Gard Test execution in progress on neg ap 1 2 PROGe YY TTT AP Card Test Launched Figure 5 43 Example of an In Progress Window The progress bar shows the operation status A percentage display exists for SW Download and NE Reset The display continues to show 90 until the end of the process The Cancel button will be disabled if either the SW Download or the NVDS Restore commands are being executed i e an FTP process is still run ning 7 Wait until this process is finished After the download process has correctly finished the connection to the NE breaks off To re establish the connectio
212. g disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs The following files are being installed with setuid and or setgid permissions lt ObjectStore path gt sunpro lib oscminit lt setuid root gt Do you want to install these as setuid setgid files y n q 28 Type y and press Return This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOSRT gt y n 29 Type y and press Return Installing ObjectStore 5 0 _SP3 Runtime for Any Media NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script Nkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AEM NB R1 5 2 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee ObjectStore Config uration 363 211 402 Remember execute osconfig to set the envi ronment Ukkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkx You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOSRT 1log Installation of lt LuOSRT gt was successful Object Store configuration The default copy of ObjectStore to configure is in lt ObjectStore path gt sunpro Is this the copy that you want to configure yes u 30 Press Retur
213. ge appears Login incorrect please try again Confirm the message by pressing Return or clicking OK and repeat the login procedure Start Core Applica If the core applications were not yet started an administrator has to do this tions cf Chapter 3 4 4 page 3 20 before the AEM NB Access Bar can be started Start AEM NB Ac To start the AEM NB Access Bar cf Figure 3 1 after a correct login type in a ter cess Bar minal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 12 GUI Main The AEM NB Access Bar is shown AEM NB R1 5 3 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management System Access Figure 3 1 Workspace with AEM NB Access Bar 3 2 2 Logout from Operation System System Logout 363 211 402 This chapter describes how to log out from the system You can log out manually or be logged out automatically after a certain time of mouse and keyboard inactiv ity Complete the following procedure to log out manually Step Procedure 1 Close the AEM NB Access Bar window 2 Click on the Exit symbol in the workspace manager or select Log out in the workspace menu 3 A message box pops up Press Return or click OK to confirm the logout Press Cancel not to log out After a logout the login screen is displayed again gt NOTE During the client installation cf 2 2 1 2 page 2 27 a cron process is in Stalled This cron automatically kills the GUI processes ever
214. gement and Maintenance Alarm Management Table 6 2 LED Meanings Circuit Pack Meanings COMDAC m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes during software download and turnup Indicates that this COMDAC is active ee ee Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical alll T Lit when the highest severity alarm is major yelow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is near end yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is far end m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack m Flashes on turnup Lit when a test is in progress MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm in puts is active ae Bae For future use All Applica m Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack tion Packs a fra during software download and turn P MDSU A red Lit onan a fault is detected on the circuit pack CTU cm C m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 5 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management NE Linares Shelf View AnyMedia Access System e amp FLT FLT amp ll 1fO 2 1 0 3 I comigicom2y ctu Lar far J AP 3 J AP lt 4 Figure 6 2 Shelf View m MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View Window Circuit Pack E Meanings CU m Lit wh
215. ghijk 3 6 4 3 Daily Incremental Weekly Cumula tive Backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be done Table 3 19 Backup Levels of Each Backup AEM NB R1 5 3 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Backup and Restore The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 20 Examples for Files in Backup for Two Weeks 1st week 2nd week AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 31 System Management Log Management 3 7 Log Management The log management records information on events in the AEM NB The logged events can be viewed with the Log Viewer 3 7 1 Different Log Types There are three log types within the Log Viewer Actions It contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM NB and which imply changes in the AEM NB configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM NB print reports and backup amp restore That means all operations triggered by the user or the AEM NB and all subsequent actions Also the results of operations are logged in the actions log m System Internal Events It contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM NB or indicate errors which oc curred in the AEM NB Autonomous Reports lt contains all information
216. gical DS1s and Logical TOs to the selected VRT VB It also displays on demand the VRT VB operational state In the case of TR 303 this window will show the VFDE state enable or disable and datalink protection information AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 75 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Ee ee Parameters Buttons Description Actions Four buttons provide access to other windows Edit Logical DS1 List Provides access to the Logical DS1 List window for the selected VRT VB cf Chapter 5 4 5 page 5 88 Edit Logical TO List Provides access to the Logical T0 List window for the selected VRT VB cf Chapter 5 4 8 page 5 112 Add Logical DS1 Provides access to the Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window tab Cross connection cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 81 The VRT VB id will be populated using the selected VRT VB id Add Logical T0 Provides access to the Logical TO win dow for the selected VRT VB cf Chapter 5 4 7 page 5 90 Operational The Service State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values In Service IS and Out of Service OOS The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service states The following panes are only applicable to TR 303 cf Chapter 5 4 4 page 5 88 VFDE Two radio buttons Enable Disable are used to modify the VFDE status by clicking on Apply The Apply button is available only
217. h a TL1 system interface TL1SI or CIT or a GSI can be connected This interface is typically used during initial installation m A local LAN interface on the AnyMedia Access System shelf provides ac cess to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface will be over Transaction Control Pro tocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and is the way to the AEM NB m Remote Operations Channel a remote LAN interface which uses TCP IP to communicate with the AEM NB The OAM amp P functionality is provided via a nailed up DSO link that is part of the DS1 payload connectivity to the AnyMedia Access System shelf The DSO link originates from a data com munication network DCN that supports TCP IP over an Ethernet LAN connection on the AEM NB side and does a translation to a wide area net work WAN via multiple DSOs on the other AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 5 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview Le 5 1 1 4 External Interfaces for Circuit Testing The AnyMedia Access System provides three external interfaces for circuit test ing m Local access for manual testing via jacks on the CTU DPT 100 m Connection to the Test Access Path TAP B Remote Test Unit RTU 2 via the tip ring leads from two APs VF port cir cuits 5 1 1 5 Synchronization Interfaces The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes which can be provi sioned by the AEM NB m Extern
218. hat Not ap plicable to protection pack The switch remains in this state until a Lockout or Clear is requested Manual Switch to Protection Switches service from ser vice pack to the protection pack if the protection pack is present functional and not carrying traffic Not applicable to the protection pack This protection switch remains in effect till a protection switching Lockout Forced or Clear is entered or an Auto matic Protection Switch occurs 4 Use the menu button lO DS1 to select an appropriate IO DS1 5 Use the radio buttons in the field Protection Switch to select the desired protection Clear or Inhibit or Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection 6 Press Apply to confirm The Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM NB AEM NB R1 5 5 66 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in prog
219. he AEM NB and NE is not available AEM NB login to NE via ACT USER command but the AEM NB is in an active state trying to open aconnection TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session with the NE NOT CONNECTED CANCELLING The communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available but the AEM NB is trying to close connection TCP IP connection and commu nication session with NE The user is unavailable to execute any action CONNECTED SYNCHRONIZING The communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available but the AEM NB is trying to synchronize AEM NB and NE information The user is unavailable to execute any action until the synchronizing process Is finished After that the state changes to CONNECTED CONNECTED TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available TCP IP connection is alive and the software version currently stored in the NE is supported by the AEM NB When the association process be tween the AEM NB and NE is completed the NE state changes to CON NECTED and remains like this until the TL1 communication session is closed on user request or the TCP IP connection is lost closed 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 363 211 402 The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 section Connect NE or they are initiated by the AEM NB AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 6 31 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Managemen
220. he suggested improvement Name ________ 22 22 Lee Telephone Number ___________________ Company Organization _____________ _ _ Dalt eeoa bo hya Poe aata ne Address When you have completed this form please fax it to the address on top of this page Title AEM NB User Service Manual Release 1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 Contents About this Document IX 1 Overview IX 2 Intended Audience X 3 How to use this document XI 4 Conventions Used XII 6 General Safety Information XIII 6 1 General Notes on Safety XIII 6 2 General Safety Requirements XIV 7 Related Documentation XV 7 1 Print Copy Hard Copy XVI 7 2 CD ROM XVI 8 How to Order This Document XVI 9 How to Comment on This Document XVII Ce n M 1 Functional Description 1 1 1 1 About this Subject 1 1 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 2 1 Main Functions tee 1 2 2 ISO Functional Areas 1 3 1 2 3 Applications 1 4 1 2 4 System Working Modes To 1 3 System and Software Architecture 1 7 1 3 1 Functional Groups 1 7 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 16 1 4 Working with AEM NB 1 18 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation IGEA 1 4 2 Configuration Management 1 20 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance 1 21 1 4 4 System Security and User Groups 1 26 1 5 Network Configuration 1 27 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN 1 27 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 Ill arr Contents 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clien
221. hen a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Balance1 Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or BAL1 CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Auto Balance2 Mode This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Loss Mode This option menu can be used to specify whether the AP or LOSS CU will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to con trol the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescription set values Possible values 2 5 Fixed Default 2 RTLP Receive This slider is used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in dB Transmission Negative values define loss positive values define gain Even clay Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed this control will be disabled Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 TTLP Transmit This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or Transmission loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de Level Point fine gain Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed this control will be
222. his section describes the backup and restore procedures The backup procedure uploads the data from the NE s COMDAC to the AEM NB The restore function deals with the downloading of a previous backup NVDS from the AEM NB to the NE Both functions apply to both simplex and duplex NE configurations Backup restore For database backup and restoration the AEM NB is able to create maintain a Data copy of provisioning data from the active COMDAC NVDS When a loss of data occurs in the NE due to factors such as human error power failure or hardware and software failures the restoration features enable the AEM NB to restore a previous backup to one NE Backup Media The AEM NB is able to store the backup copy in diverse storage media that can include Hard Disk Drive HDD tapes removable disk cartridges and any other available mass storage medium FTP For database backup and restoration operations the AEM NB uses a File Transfer Protocol FTP connection within the NE FTP allows the AEM NB to overwrite or copy information residing on the NE The AEM NB can open only one FTP session per NE at a time where the AEM NB will support the client role of the FTP session and the AnyMedia Access Sys tem will play the server part AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 117 Configuration Management Provisioning Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS ee 5 6 1 Data Backup Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup Step Procedur
223. ical This button provides access to the Physical DS1 Logical DS1 DS1 window to edit the Logical DS1 parameters whenever this is possible and the Physical DS1 parameters Delete Logical Deletes the Physical DS Logical DS1 cross connection se DS1 lected in the list AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 79 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee 2 Use the radio buttons to choose a desired VRT VB If you want then to add a Logical DS1 press Add Logical DS1 The Physi cal DS1 Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 81 to edit a Logical DS1 select a row in the Logical DS1 List and press Edit Logical DS7 The Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 page 5 88 to delete a Logical DS1 refer to Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 89 AEM NB R1 5 5 80 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning o E N S 5 4 3 Creation of VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 Cross Connection Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected a logical feeder is not yet created and the physical feeder DS1 is not in use by any other logical feeder The following figure shows a block diagram of T1 cross connections LOG FDR Logical Feeder LOG FDR DS1 1 LOG FDR DS1 28 T1 Cross Connections LOG FDR DS1 1 TR 08 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT Figure 5 34 T1 Cross Connections Procedure Complete the fol
224. ided with a small ar row pointing to the right gt These menu options have a submenu that will open as soon as you click on the menu option A submenu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option gt Submenu option e g Network View gt Submaps gt Open List A submenu option again may offer a submenu then an appropriate number of gt is added 3 3 7 Cursor Menu Menu at the Cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop Position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button Is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all windows The functions which can be executed using this cur sor menu depend on the application of the respective window Select Menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu Option Step Procedure 1 Press the right mouse button 2 Move the cursor onto the desired menu option 3 Click the left or right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and click somewhere outside the menu AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 11 General Information on Keyboard and Windows System Management a SeSe 3 3 8 Workspace Manager After logging in to the operation system SUN Solaris the workspace manager window Is situated at the bottom of the scre
225. iguration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration a New Enter the Date and Time in order to change the NE date and time possible range for the date is 1 Jan 1970 to 31 Dec 2037 Press Apply to confirm The Apply button is active only if a new date and or new time have been entered AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 57 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Le 5 3 2 6 Configure Simplex COMDAC Protec tion Scheme Overview The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode or duplex mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Required and the AEM NB is not able to change it until one of the COM DACs is removed When a COMDAC is removed the AEM NB is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled sim plex Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the COMDAC protection to simplex Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt COMDAC in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar The COMDAC window pops up COMDAC zi NE Name NE4 Slot comdac 1 1 Inventory Information Card Type COMDAC Serial Number 980008217407 Apparatus Code COM100 Program Code CLEI SLC1CGOCAA EGI 228863 Sw Version 1 2 1 icc 1 1 Operation amp Protection Sio
226. iguration reports database changes LED status reports switch reports and some events of the type protection switching and inhibit messages m ASYNC The AEM NB database and the NE configuration data are out of synchroni zation and or configuration reports are inhibited and or the AEM NB config uration messages buffer is overflown 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after As sociation Alarm Data The AEM NB maintains alarm data for each NE These data are updated with all NE alarms and environment alarms from the NEs database To change synchroni zation settings see Chapter 5 3 2 2 page 5 46 Synchronization The following figure illustrates the NE state model depending on the synchroniza States Diagram tion state between the alarm data kept in the NE and the AEM NB alarm data base AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 33 Fault Management and Maintenance SYNC ASYNC Configuration Data 6 5 5 Information Management and Maintenance Alarm Buffer Overflow Detection Alarm Sync Process Figure 6 12 NE Alarm Data Synchronization States There are two NE alarm synchronization states m SYNC The AEM NB alarm database is consistent with the current NE alarms If alarm and or environment alarm reports are inhibited the AEM NB data base is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time m ASYNC The AEM NB alarm database and the current NE alarms are out of syn chronization due to
227. ilege levels within the managed domain This is mapped to the NE privilege levels accordingly Administrator has all the permissions Maintenance has configuration and monitoring permissions Monitoring has alarm monitoring and testing permissions AEM NB R1 5 1 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee m NE User Security Privilege Levels lt is possible to administer the NE users and the privilege levels via the cut through interface m User Access is authenticated through User Name and Password m Single Login to Access the Domain Enables an authorized user to access multiple NEs simultaneously e g multiple windows using a single login and password m Domain Partitioning Enables the NEs managed by the AEM NB to be partitioned into separate security domains and permits users access to the domains based on their areas of responsibility and profile a User Inactivity Timer The user terminal will be locked with a screen saver once a configurable in activity timer has expired To unlock the terminal the user has to type his her password The timer has to be configured by the administrator m Lock Screen The user is able to lock the screen whenever he wants To unlock the termi nal the user has to enter his her password Common Servers Common Servers offer general purpose services A common server m manages the AEM NB history and security logs m logs the h
228. in the status for this alarm is changed from acknowledged to raised Additionally the acknowledge data user Id if available is removed from the alarm information AEM NB R1 5 6 2 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Raise Acknowledge ACKNOWLEDGED creat Acknowledge Clear Figure 6 1 Life Cycle of an Alarm 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User Overview Any time incorrect data out of range values inappropriate value types etc is entered at the Graphical User Interface GUI a new alarm occurs or the status of any alarm changes to raised again an alarm message Is reported to the AEM NB The alarms are indicated if defined visually and acoustically Visual Alarm Indi The occurrence of a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is visu cation ally indicated in different ways m Notification icon displayed in the AEM NB access bar This icon consists of a flag and a counter The flag is raised only the first time a new alarm of the defined severity is reported to the AEM NB Addi tionally the counter is increased Every time the user clicks on the icon the flag is lowered and the counter is reset before the AEM NB requires confirmation The alarm severity affecting the notification icon is configurable via the sys tem variables in the file SANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 3 Fault Management and Mainten
229. includes tasks for m Initializing the local copy when an NE is add to the AEM NB m Maintaining the local copy concerning equipment changes m 8 Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the NE and reporting differences m Inventory Management system activity of collecting updating and re porting data on AnyMedia Access System equipage and system status in cluding providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not NE Memory Administration this means the management of the Nonvol atile Data Storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System Backup amp Re store NE Software Administration this involves tasks to manage the Nonvola tile Program Storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System software download copying the NVPS between controller CARDS etc MDS2 MDS2B management which in this release involves m MDS2 MDS2B shelf Slots Alarming Configuration m Retrieve amp Maintain MDS2 MDS2B Inventory information For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements documentation AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 7 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window 5 2 Configuration Manager Win dow This major application provides the operator with the facilities needed to fully con figure AnyMedia network elements both equipment and services Configuration Manager File Edit View Equip
230. indow pops up NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in progress After the restoration is finished the following message is displayed NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in completed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 5 119 Configuration Management Provisioning NE Reset 5 7 NE Reset This menu is used to reset the NE s NVDS to the factory default except for the IP address so that the AEM NB can still communicate with the NE after command execution is complete Procedure Complete the following procedure to get the inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE Reset INIT SYS via the Menu bar A Warning window pops up NE Reset is service affecting The data stored in the NE Name will be destroyed and set to the default manufacturing values Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send an INIT SYS to the NE to reset the NVDS to its default values An In Progress window pops up Reset lt NE Name gt in progress gt NOTE After the reset process has correctly finished the connection to the NE breaks off To re establish the connection proceed with Step 3 3 Select Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 4 Press Connect in the Connection pane to establish the connection AEM NB R1 5 5 120 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning TL1 Cut Thr
231. ing measurement information AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 17 Functional Description Working with AEM NB 1 4 Working with AEM NB Goal of this This chapter will outline the management activities and processes in the AEM NB Chapter The main emphasis is on presenting everyday operation processes The chapter is structured with respect to the various network life cycle phases see further be low User Profiles There are 3 default user profiles the administrator maintenance and monitoring profile The rights belonging to these profiles are described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 26 Life Cycle of a The individual life cycle of a telecommunication network has the following phases Network planning installation provisioning operation amp surveillance modification and fi nally decommissioning Modification of a network may take the form of fine adjust ment expansion or restructuring of the network and addition of new functionality Figure 1 6 shows the life cycle of a network Installation Provisioning Modification Operation amp Surveillance Decommissioning Figure 1 6 Life Cycle of a Network Support by The AEM NB is mainly used in three life cycle phases during network provision AEM NB ing network modification and network operation amp surveillance The installation phase is supported by the Graphical System Interface GSI AEM NB R1 5 1 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functiona
232. ing the USM 363 211 402 to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 XVII About this Document How to Comment on This a S AEM NB R1 5 XVIII Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description Contents 1 1 About this Subject 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 Main Functions 1 2 2 ISO Functional Areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration Management 1 2 2 2 Fault Management 1 2 2 3 Performance Management 1 2 2 4 Security Management 1 2 3 Applications 1 2 4 System Working Modes 1 3 System and Software Architecture 1 3 1 Functional Groups 1 3 1 1 NE Management 1 3 1 2 General Components 1 3 1 3 Software Platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software Bus kad Repository 1 3 1 4 Graphical User Interface GUI 1 3 1 5 Northbound Interface 1 3 1 6 Southbound Interface 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture 1 3 2 2 Requirements 14 Working with AEM NB 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 I o rr Contents 1 4 2 Configuration Management 1 20 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance Tti 1 4 3 1 Fault Management 1 21 1 4 3 1 1 Fault Identification 1 22 1 4 3 1 2 Fault Localisation and Diagnosis 1 23 1 4 3 1 3 Fault Clearance 1 23 1 4 3 2 Network Modification 1 24 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and Removal of a NE 1 24 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs 1 25 1 4 3 3 Performance Monitoring 1 25 1 4 4 System Security and User Groups
233. ings or a local GSI NB LAN or RS 232C because the SPLL service carrying the remote opera tions channel must be in service to get remote access to the NE via remote oper ations channel Provisioning the The following actions have to be made to provision the ROC over SPLL manage ROC via GSI ment interface Provision the Local Digital Switch LDS that is connected to the NE shelf to associate the DSO channel to a SPLL service m Provision the NE using the ENT T0 TL1 command to indicate that the re ceived DSO is a 64 Kbps clear channel gsfn 4do AEM NB R1 5 A 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations ee m Provision the NE using the ENT CRS T0 command to indicate that the re ceived DSO should be cross connected to the logical ROC port Note that the remote operations port TO cross connection created for a TR 08 VRT will cause system bandwidth to be allocated while for TR 303 this com mand is more an association function than a cross connection No actual cross connection is made in TR 303 until a request to connect the logical line specified in this command is received from the LDS over the EOC data link for semi permanent connections m Provision the NE using the SET IP command to an unique IP address Provisioning the TL1 commands can be used to configure the NE Note that the default router ad ROC via TL1 using dress of the NE must be set to 224 0 0 2 univer
234. inguish both cases 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment Alarms can only be acknowledged by a user at the user interface It is possible to ac knowledge all alarms types If an alarm is acknowledged its state is updated accordingly and the user identification and the last changed time are registered Acknowledging an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the action log It is possible to acknowledge an alarm that has already been acknowl edged The user identification and the new acknowledge time are registered as well overwriting the previous acknowledge data 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms General The NE alarms are cleared by the NE AMS Platform alarms are cleared automat ically e g NE AEM NB association alarms or by a user at the user interface e g log alarms Users can only clear specific platform alarms Users cannot clear the association alarms for the NE alarms When an alarm is cleared its state is up dated and the time is registered too Clearing an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the autonomous report log if the user clears an alarm this will be logged in the action log if an alarm is cleared by the NE it will be logged in the autonomous report log If the raise is newer then it is a repetitive raise the alarm state is set to the raised State If the raise is older then this message is ignored the alarm state sta
235. ion Executing preremove script Removing data bases TRACE Removing NEM data base TRACE Removing CM data base TRACE Removing ALM data base TRACE Removing SEC data base Removing pathnames in class lt channels_24 gt Removing pathnames in class lt common gt lt files list gt Executing postremove script Updating system information Removal of lt LuANY16S gt was successful You have now removed the AnyMedia Servers package 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyMedia Client package Complete the following procedure to remove the AnyMedia Client package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Type pkgrm LuANY16S and press Return The following package is currently installed LUANY16C AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Client sparc LUANY16C_X Xc AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 41 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Ee Do you want to remove this package 3 Type y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuANY16C gt This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of removing this package Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q 4 Type y and press Return Verifying package dependencies Processing package information Executing preremove script Removing pathnames in class lt channels_24 gt Removing pathnames in class lt common gt lt
236. ion Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Use the tabs Physical DS1 Data and Logical DS1 Data to edit the Logi cal Feeder Data gt NOTE Physical Feeder If the new DS1 is not in use both a delete cross connection and a new en ter cross connection message are sent to the NE If the new DS1 is in use both existing cross connections are released old and new DS1 via two delete cross connection messages and two new cross connections are created via two enter cross connection messages 5 4 6 Delete VRT VB Logical Feeder Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected the Logical Feeder is created and the Service State of the Logical Feeder is well known Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a Logical Feeder T1 froma VRT VB Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type gt VRT VB id in the Network Browser and Edit Logical DS1 List via the cursor menu or select Service gt Logical DS1 List via the Menu bar The Logical DS1 List window pops up Z Select the appropriate VRT VB id in the table Logical DS1 List 3 Click on Delete Logical DS1 A Warning window pops up Deleting Logical DS1 id may be service affecting and may remove existing semi permanent cross connections DSO end points OK to proceed If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send a delete cross connec tion message to the NE AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 I
237. ion reports are inhibited and or AEM NB configuration message buffer is overflowing For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements documentation 5 3 2 2 2 Alarm Information Synchronization Overview In general alarms can be considered independently of each other any alarm re port can be processed by the AEM NB independent of other alarm reports The AEM NB distinguishes two possible states for alarm handling alarms from NEs are enabled or they are inhibited Two NE synchronization states can be considered m Sycn The AEM NB alarm database is consistent with the current NE alarms lf alarm and or environment alarm reports are inhibited the AEM NB database is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain mo ment in time m Async The AEM NB alarm database and the current NE alarms are out of synchronization due to alarm buffer overflow The AEM NB alarm database is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements documentation AEM NB R1 5 5 46 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration a Parameter Setting Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization states for configu ration and alarms and to define the autonomous output states Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt
238. irst time this window is opened level two is displayed i e all NEs By selecting an NE it is possible to gradually explode this level to display the shelf s slots and ports if any as well as network interfaces and user ports NE Connection The Network Browser displays at the NE level an icon that identifies the connec State tion state of each NE not connected not connected trying not connected can celling connected synchronizing and connected 5 2 2 Menu Bar The Menu bar entries are enabled disabled depending on the object selected in the Network Browser The following table describes the Menu bar s main entries and subsequent submenus The right column Available at level identifies the Network Browser item that needs to be selected to have this menu option avail able to the user Menu entries Available at level File gt New gt NE All File gt Open NE Shelf Slot User Port physical and logical Phys ical DS1 physical and logi cal Logical DS1 List Logi cal TO List VRT VB List VRT VB id File gt Delete NE File gt Print gt Window File gt Print gt Table File gt Print gt Preview File gt Exit Any Edit gt Cut Text editing field Edit gt Copy Text editing field Edit gt Paste Text editing field AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 9 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window ETT EE Menu entries Available at level Edit
239. is opened press Apply or to set no new default type press Cancel print displayed log select File gt Print Table or File gt Pre The Log Viewer table or a screenshot of view the window is printed out display updated log select File gt Reload Newly logged entries are displayed sort the log click on one of the column headers to The Log Viewer table is displayed sorted sort the log according to the column en alphabetically or by date and time tries alphabetically or by date and time Click again to reverse the sort order close one Log select File gt Close or press Close The selected Log Viewer window is Viewer window closed close all Log Viewer select File gt Exit All Log Viewer windows are closed windows AEM NB R1 5 3 36 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Log Management Select Default View The following window pops up if you have chosen to set a new default log type via Options gt Default Type to be displayed at every start up of the Log Viewer You can select a log type and press Ok or close the window without any actions with Cancel Actions stem Internal Events Autonomous Reports Selected type Actions o Ok _ Cancel Figure 3 13 Set Default Type AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 37 System Management 3 8 System Variables System Variables The values of some system variables are specified in the file AnyMediaNBEM cfg which is locat
240. istory and security data of other processes upon request m provides log information upon request m provides a facility to generate and print client reports in the AEM NB printers m provides event distribution services based on a supplier consumer model 1 3 1 3 Software Platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software Bus CORBA The communication between the AEM NB processes is based on the Common Architecture Object Request Broker Architecture CORBA standard The heart of the CORBA architecture is the Object Request Broker ORB The ORB is a software bus to which different applications can connect to offer their services and or to use other applications services from which they are clients The ORB provides a transport mechanism that makes connected servers loca tion platform and implementation transparent to their clients making applications easier to distribute and scale 1 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 13 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee Protocol The protocol used by the ORB is the Internet Interoperability Protocol IIOP 1 3 1 3 2 Repository Introduction The Repository contains all the AEM NB information that must be persistent It is supported by an Object Oriented Database ObjectStore and the underlying op erating file system All components of the system have direct access to the repos itory to store retrieve their own data Contained Info
241. it the Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window m select All gt NE gt Shelf gt IO DS1 gt Physical DS1 in the Network Browser and select Edit via the cursor menu AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 71 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning pe et ee oe nn a a 7 Y Y from O DS1 window Equip from AP or CU window ment Configuration VRT VB List Equipment Configuration cf cf Chapter 5 3 page 5 14 Chapter 5 3 page 5 14 VRTs VBs Logical DS1 List Logical TO List Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Logical TO Figure 5 30 Screen Navigation for Service Provisioning AEM NB R1 5 5 72 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Le 5 4 1 Edit Network Interface Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure a VRT VB Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VB List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt View Edit via the Menu bar The VAT VB List window pops up VRT VB List NE Name Selection Criteria Display All VRT VBs i TR 303 YVRT VB List Figure 5 31 VRI VB List Window This window displays the VRT VB ids list based on a selection criterion It pro vides access to the VRT VB window for addition or deletion of Logical DS1s AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 73 Configuration Management Pro
242. it until the Port Test Result window cf Figure 6 9 page 6 25 appears and view the test result AEM NB R1 5 6 24 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management Test Result The Port Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit HE Name nes Slat ap 1 2 Card Type PROG Ww Port id drop 1 2 2 Result Passed Close Figure 6 9 The Port Test Result Window The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 10 Meaning of the Text Fields in the Port Test Result Window Text Fields Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the Any string consisting of up to selected NE as specified at NE 30 characters creation time Slot The slot number of the AP be AP 1 AP 16 ing used Card Type Mnemonic used to identify the PROG2W PRCOIN and general type of function pro POTS32 vided AP card type Physical The port within the AP Port 1 Port 32 Port id Result The result of the test routines PASS or FAIL Click Close to dismiss the Port Test Result window AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 25 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management ee 6 4 2 AP Card Test Purpose By means of an AP card test you are able to start a series of self diagnostic rou tines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its common circuitry Procedure Proceed as f
243. k units COMDAC CIU lO DS1 CTU and application packs APs which have pre designated slots with the capability to plug in the circuit pack Each fascicle can be identified by its number and contains a chapter which is numbered accordingly e g Chapter 2 is contained in Fascicle 2 The page figure and table numbering begins with 1 in every chapter To be able to identify them easily these numbers are prefixed with the fascicle number For example Figure 2 3 designates the third figure in Fascicle 2 Cross reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering i e the first number in cross references refers to the corresponding fascicle To facilitate the location of specific text passages the guide contains so called keyword blocks These are placed to the left of the main text and contain either a keyword or a word which indicates the contents of a paragraph or group of para graphs Each abbreviation used in this guide is listed in Fascicle AB Abbreviations of the hardcopy version unless it can be assumed that the reader is familiar with this abbreviation Commands and messages are displayed in constant width font e g tar xf cdrom cdrom_name AnyMediaEMSR10 tar The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page Trade marks of Lucent Technologies and other companies are in italics and the trade marks modify a noun e g the system name contains a trademark AnyMedia Ac
244. kController ITU International Telecommunication Union AAAA L LAN Local Area Network LBER Low Bit Error Ratio LDS LED Light Emitting Diode LIC License LLN Logical Line Number AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 AB 5 Abbreviations ee LPBK Loop Back LS Loop Start M MDS Metallic Distribution Server MDSU Metallic Distribution Server Unit MEA Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes MHz Megahertz MJ Major alarm severity MLT Mechanized Loop Testing MM Module Manager MN Minor alarm severity MON Degraded Signal MR Modification Request MSC Metallic Shelf Controller N NB Narrow Band NE Network Element NEM Network Element Management AnyMedia EM subsystem NM Network Management AEM NB R1 5 AB 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Abbreviations NMA Network Monitoring and Analysis NMS Network Management System NVDS Nonvolatile Data Storage NVPS Nonvolatile Program Storage O OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance OCU Office Channel Unit OMG Object Management Group OODB Object Oriented Database OOS Out Of Service OPS Operations System ORB Object Request Broker OS Operation System eee P PBX Private Branch Exchange PC Personal Computer PCM Pulse Code Modulation PID Password Identifier PLN Physical Line Number AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 AB 7 Abbreviations Se S PL
245. kage files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent j AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 21 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Ee 2 22 W W Enter selection q 36 Type a user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected kkkBoot processes Do you like install the SystemAdmin process on the system boot y n q STA Type y to confirm and press Return or type n to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y the following request is displayed Start up MODE 1 ALL to start up all AnyMedia applications 2 CORE to start up only core AnyMedia appli cations Enter selection q 38 Type the desired Start up more lt 1 or 2 gt x xx xcron processes RemoveAlm cron process will be executed every day at 3 00 AM Do you like change it y n q 39 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y the following requests are displayed Enter minute 0 59 q 40 Type a valid entry Enter hour 0 23 q 41 Type a valid entry Enter day of the month 1 31 q AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a 42 Type a valid entry Enter month of the year 1 12 q 43 Type a valid entry Enter day
246. l Description Working with AEM NB a 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation Network Planning In the network planning phase all specifications and requirements of the future network operation are translated into a concrete network structure That means the network planning phase during which a decision on the network topology equipment and components is made has to take place before the operation with the AEM NB starts Physical The installation of the network follows the planning phase The installation in Installation cludes the following steps Physical NE installation This includes the installation of racks plug in units and cabling of the NEs m Creation of a DCN plan Communication between the AEM NB and the NEs is carried out via the Data Communication Network DCN A DCN plan should be drawn up be fore provisioning the network to ensure that the AEM NB can reach all NEs and that the administration of the DCN does not lead to an undue increase in performance requirements m NE connection to the AEM NB server m OS connection to the AEM NB Server optional m Installation of the third party application and AEM NB software on the AEM NB Server Network Status After completion of these steps the network operator has at his disposal a net after Physical work which is connected physically with AEM NB and which is in principle ready Installation for operation AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 9
247. l be deleted Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical TO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical TO will be deleted Ok to proceed 4 If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list Table 5 1 AP Cards Possible Values Card Type CLEI PROG2W E5ISFBOAAA POTS32 SLCUVROBAA PRCOIN E5ISFAOAAA ISDN16_U E5PQAXUAAA AFM_DS33 SLCUZNOBAA ADSL4 E5ICNJOAAA MDSU MSU100 SAPQADMBAA AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 37 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee 5 3 2 1 7 Configure MSC The MSC Metallic Shelf Controller circuit pack provides the required shelf inter face and central control for half of the MDS2 Shelf or MDS2B Shelf The corresponding window contains all information related to MSC It can be dis played even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the MSC Metallic Shelf Controller data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt MSC in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack MSC in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View win dow The MSC window pops up NE Name nes Slot msc 1 1 Inventory Data Card Type __ laa Cena E o E
248. l button provides different functions Connect Disconnect Can cel The field Connection State reflects the current connection state with the NE Not Connected Not Connected Trying Not Connected Cancelling Connected Synchronizing and Connected The label button on the right hand side can be used to change the connec tion state Connect if the connection state is Not Connected Disconnect AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 19 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration BE SeSe if the connection state is Connected or Connected Synchronizing Cancel if the connection state is Not Connected Trying Edit and provisioning actions are only possible once the connection is established Only in this case the NE can be displayed on the Network Browser Adding an NE is normally followed by setting timing source cf Chapter 5 3 2 4 page 5 52 and configuring simplex COMDAC protection cf Chapter 5 3 2 6 page 5 58 AEM NB R1 5 5 20 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 2 Edit View of Configuration Data All edit view actions of configuration data can be started via NE Name Information window NE Name Informa non NE Details NE View Synchronization NE Inventory Data l Timing source Control l Date amp Time l NE Data NE Name INES NE id Ce Communication Info IP Address 5 88 20 8 Apply TID isystemos Authentification Logi
249. l office The NEs are located at remote locations a remote LAN may exist at the re mote location The OAM amp P information is transported from the AEM NB in the central of fice to the NEs in the remote locations via a public private X 25 network An X 25 router maybe a PC with X 25 and Ethernet cards is needed at both sides AEM NB and NE sides for interfacing X 25 network playing the role of the X 25 DTE and the LANs The router performs the mapping from IP to X 25 and is responsible for call set up data transfer and call clearing in the X 25 network The local LAN OA amp M NE interface will be used for the communication between the router and the AEM NB NEs X 25 Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs or Switched Virtual Circuits SVCs are established for interchanging information AEM NB R1 5 Issue2 09 99 A 9 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations ee ee A 6 2 1 Router Configuration Router Bridge Re The minimal requirements for the router bridge for supporting this scenario are GULre RIE Minimal WAN Interface Requirements The router bridge must have one or more X 25 DTE interfaces An IP ad dress has to be assigned to every X 25 DTE interface m Minimal LAN Interface Requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purpose Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing should be supported Router Bridge Pro Provisioning
250. le disable visual notification of critical severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true VISUAL_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV enable disable visual notification of major severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 47 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters me ee configuration parameter name description VISUAL _MINOR_ALARM_SEV enable disable visual notification of minor severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true VISUAL_INFO_ALARM_ SEV enable disable visual notification of infor mation severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AUDI CRITICAL _ALARM_ SEV enable disable audio notification of critical severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AUDI_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV enable disable audio notification of major severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AUDI MINOR _ALARM_SEV enable disable audio notification of minor severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AUDI INFO _ALARM_ SEV enable disable audio notification of infor mation severity alarms Range of values true to enable
251. le type of interface Format v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Logical TO id Indicates the Logical TO id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3dp 1 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA m Physical Port Id Displays the Physical Port id cross connected to the Logical TO Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 for APs m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 for CUs m GSFN Generic Signalling Function The following val ues are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin AC EBS LR DPT 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS TO DX4 N R FX O PS T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO TD O S A B C D TO4 ISDN 4DO DATA NO1 NO2 OCU1 OCU2 OCU3 SW56 BRI Unknown Edit Logical This button provides access to the Logical To window to edit TO the Logical TO parameters whenever this is possible gt NOTE This button is disable if GSFN Unknown Delete Logical Deletes the cross connection selected in the list cf TO Chapter 5 4 9 page 5 112 2 Use the radio buttons to choose a desired Logical TO 3 Click on Add Logical T0 The new VRT VB id will be inserted into the Logical TO list 4 Select an appropriate entry in the Logical TO list and click on Edit VRT VB or double click on the entry The Logical TO window pops up AEM NB R1 5 5 92 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Logical TO NE Na
252. lect owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP I anymedia lucent k W W Enter selection q 14 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOX23RT gt y n 15 Type y and press Return Installing Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOX23RT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt AEM NB R1 5 2 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt cfg gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOX23RT 1log Installation of lt LuOX23RT gt was successful OrbixNames 1 1c Processing package instance lt LuOXNS gt from Installation lt tmp lucent_pkg 4 gt OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5
253. lection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the pane Logical DS1 List m All VRTs VBs The list displays all Logical DS1s cur rently present in the NE for all VRT VBs m TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases except TR 303 a non editable option list will be available showing the possible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids automatically sets the corresponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it Possible values v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Add Logical This button is only available if a specific VRT VB id has been DS1 selected and the maximum number of Logical DS1s has not yet been created max 4 for TR 08 max 20 for TR 303 max 1 for INA This button provides access to the Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window to add a new Logical DS1 Logical DS1 The information in this field is displayed in a table List VRT VB id Displays a logical part of the NE that sup ports a single type of interface Format v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Logical DS1 id Indicates the Logical DS1 id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA m Physical DS1 Id Displays the Physical DS1 id cross connected to the Logical DS1 id Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Edit Log
254. licable to the SPQ452 dual OCU data port which is primarily used in an end link of a DDS private line data service Service Details Parameters Description Rate This option menu can be used to specify the subscriber data rate in kbps for the subscriber interface Possible values OCU1 24 48 96 192 OCU2 384 560 OCU3 640 Default 19 2 for OCU1 56 0 for OCU2 64 0 for OCUS Error Correc This option menu can be used to select the error correction tion technique for the DSO path The MVEC option is applicable only for subscriber data rates of 19 2 kbps and less SCEC requires two DSO time slots Possible values OCU1 NONE MVEC Default NONE OCU2 OCU3 NONE SCEC Default NONE All Zero Code All Zero Code allowed when a check mark is set the chan nel unit will not allow a word containing 8 zeros to be sent to ward the digital facility Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3 Set SCC Secondary channel used when a check mark is set the channel unit supports a low speed telemetry channel in the subscriber s data bits Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3 Set QM When a check mark is set the channel unit will send Abnor mal Station Code to the Network upon detecting an exces sive number of bipolar violations from the loop Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCUS Not set AEM NB R1 5 5 108 Issue2 0
255. ll be logged is not among these logs Actions System Internal Events and delete oldest recorded day of this log Alarms The log system issues an alarm if m one of the logs is shortened to a number of days below the minimum num ber of days l e also if a log is shortened that already holds fewer than the minimum number of days Alarm name LOG_DEL_PART m the current day of a log is deleted Alarm name LOG_DEL_FULL Restore Log Files When log files are restored cf Chapter 3 6 the log of the current day is not over written 3 7 3 Log Viewer Window The logs can be viewed by means of the Log Viewer application The logged en tries in the Log Viewer cannot be edited Start Log Viewer The Log Viewer is started up by clicking on the log viewer icon in the Access Bar After start up the default log type is displayed this value can be configured de fault Actions Access Permission The log types which are visible to you depend on your user group The following table shows the log types which the different user groups are allowed to see Table 3 22 Visibility of a Log Type for a Certain User Group Log type Visible for user group Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Reports Administrator Maintenance Monitoring AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 33 System Management Log Management ce Y File Options Help Log Selection Type Action
256. local file a locally mounted file or a local tape device Archive Files Use the following command to archive log files This function is primarily intended to archive the AEM NB log files If you enter none of the optional parameters the AEM NB log files will be archived AEMNB archive c p path f file Parameter description C Aborts a running archive operation p path path is the directory or device to archive Default path to log files f file Location of the backup file file can be a local file or a locally mounted file in case of a local tape device is used file speci fies a soft label Default file name EM_SYSARCH_yyyymmdd arc with yyyy year mm month dd day of the archive AEM NB R1 5 3 26 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Backup and Restore hi o 3 6 3 Backup Archive and Restore Proce dures This section gives an overview of the steps necessary for a backup archive or re store operation Prerequisite for The backup archive or restore commands require that some path system vari Backup Restore ables are properly set This is done by the command AnyMediaNBEM sh during and Archive the installation of AEM NB If this command was not executed the backup archive or restore commands will not work Different Users When different users perform backup archive or restore operations the system will display a message asking whether temporary data which remained from the previou
257. lowing procedure to add a logical feeder T1 to a VRT VB Further information is contained in Chapter 5 4 5 page 5 88 for editing the VRT VB logical feeder cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 89 for deleting the VRT VB logi cal feeder Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VB List gt VRT Type gt VRT VB id in the Net work Browser and Add Logical DS1 via the cursor menu or select Service gt Provisioning gt Add gt Logical DS1 via the Menu bar The Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window pops up gt NOTE There are different ways to open this window cf Figure 5 30 page 5 72 Depending of the previous actions the options in the window are different AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 81 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 5 82 Issue 2 09 99 Physical DS1 Logical DS1 NE Name nes VRT VB ID ina 1 Cross Connection Physical DS Data Logical DSi Data Cross Connection Information Physical DS1 ds1 1 1 3 Logical DS1 ina 1 Delete Logical DS1 Figure 5 35 Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Window Tab Cross Connection The tab Cross connection identifies the NE and VRT VB related to the cross connection and provides the facilities for selecting the appropriate Physical DS1 and Logical DS1 id from the lists of available ones in the case of cross connect ing Physical DS1 Logical DS1 As far as editing is concerned both fields will be non editable and the onl
258. lse no audible signal is generated for alarms of this alarm severity Alarms are audible on the server only Table 3 2 Variables for Customizing Audible Alarm Notifications Alarm Severity Variable Name Critical AUDI CRITICAL_ALARM_SEV Major AUDI_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV Minor AUDILMINOR_ALARM_SEV Info AUDI_INFO_ALARM_SEV Make Changes Changes in the system preferences file take effect only after the next start up of Take Effect the AEM NB GUI clients 3 2 3 2 Help Icon Description The Help icon provides access to the AEM NB online help If you click on the Help icon the help index is displayed 3 2 4 Capacity The AEM NB allows for a maximum of 5 simultaneous users m 100 NEs to be managed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 5 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows 3 3 General Information on Key board and Windows 3 3 1 Keyboard The keyboard offers special keys which are pressed individually or in combination with others to perform specific actions Special Keys The most important special keys are Return to confirm an entry or to start a new line when a text consisting of several lines is entered m Esc Escape to initiate an escape sequence i e the keys pressed after pressing Esc are interpreted as an instruction and not as entered text m Ctrl Control to initiate a control sequence Ctr1 is always used in combination with one or several other keys and represents an instruction
259. m The LOGIN for accessing the AEM NB server encrypted m The PASSWORD for accessing the AEM NB server encrypted A 6 1 5 Local Digital Switch Configuration Management operations have to be performed on the LDS to create the SPLL ser vice and associate this service to the DSO channel which will be cross connected with the ROC The provisioning of this DSO channel will be static with TR 08 and dynamic with TR 303 A separate SPLL needs to be established with every NE which shall be managed AEM NB R1 5 A 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations Configuration of the Up to 24 ROCs DS1 SPLL service in the T1 Router AEM NB Server GUI LDS and associate to ______ ee the DSO channel LDS _ P related to ROC E a m NE lt DS1 link i YS Oo Oe Set ee ee a E n I Semi Permanent I q DS1s TR08 TR303 Leased Lines _ Z TCP IP _ DS1s ROC over Configuration of the ROC using TL1 commands SPLL service Pa i Transport Network AAA A e o je je o o NE A a NE DS1s Figure A 5 ROC over Semi Permanent Leased Line for AEM NB A 6 2 X 25 DCN 363 211 402 The assumptions for this configuration are The LAN based element manager is located in the centra
260. me YVRT VB ID General Senice Details Logical Line Information Logical TO ID inadsoO 1 2 Physical Port Id Expected Pack Type wj Red Line Delete Figure 5 40 Logical T0 Window Tab General This window is composed of two tabs General and Service Details It is used to add Logical TO remove Logical TO or modify Logical TO The parameters shown in this window will be enabled or disabled depending on the action selected and where this action has been selected from This window allows cross connection of User Port Logical TO TO Cross connections as well as service configuration and modification Parameters Buttons Description VRT VB id This field displays the selected VRT VB id v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA gt NOTE When coming from the Application Pack window Add Logical T0 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 34 or the Physical Port id cursor menu Network Browser this field is empty and non editable An option menu with all VRT VB ids is offered for selection AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 93 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee Parameters Buttons Description GSFN Available GSFNs Group 1 DFLT 2LS 2GS Coin AC EBS LR DPT Group 2 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS TO DX4 N R FX O P S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO TD O S A B C D TO4 Group 3 ISDN Group 4 DATA NO1 NO2 OCU1 OCU2 OCU3
261. me slot assignment deassignment is done on a per service order basis The LDS will manage the semi permanent cross connections in the TR 303 VRT TR 08 VRT A TR 08 VRT supports up to 96 physical lines The logical lines are identified by logical line numbers LLNs which are integer values ranging from 1 to 96 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any LLN within any TR 08 VRT There is a fixed mapping between TR 08 LLN number and the TR 08 feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the FAST to make the cross connection between the TR 08 physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provisioning the feeder DSO to be used INA VB An INA VB supports a maximum of 24 physical lines The logical lines are num bered from 1 to 24 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any logical line within any INA VB There is a fixed mapping between INA LLN number and the INA feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the AnyMedia Access System to make the cross con nection between the INA physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provi sioning the feeder DSO to be used The AID Access Identifier of an INA logical line and its INA feeder DSO are the same For more information refer to the AMAS R1 5 network elements documentation Screen Navigation Figure 5 30 page 5 72 shows an overview of the screen navigation for service provisioning The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened Example To ed
262. ment Service Alarms TestManager TL1 Help H Network Browser i ay sh 1 i ae fimds2 1 BA VRTWE List be Logical TO List Logical DSi List Figure 5 4 Configuration Manager The initial window consists of two frames m Atthe top a menu bar provides access to all possible operations on the network elements cf Chapter 5 2 2 page 5 9 m On the left hand side the screen displays a tree like structure known as the Network Browser with the list of NEs created and manageable by the AEM NB see below Depending on previous actions the following frames are additionally available m On the right hand side a common area is used for the display of the infor mation requested through the menu bar cursor menu or tool bar if present AEM NB R1 5 5 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window A status bar is incorporated at the bottom of every single screen except of Network Browser and menu bar cf Chapter 5 2 3 page 5 11 The cursor menu will pop up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed cf Chapter 5 2 4 page 5 12 5 2 1 Network Browser The Network Browser displays the list of all NEs available to the operator ina tree like structure You can select the object you want to configure view modify or delete The action to be taken is selected from the Menu bar or the object s pop up menu cursor menu By default the f
263. mon root pid lt pid gt optimised 20949 New Connection lt host name gt lt domain_name gt IT daemon root pid lt pid gt optimised 20950 New Connection lt pid gt Killed orbixd daemon pid lt pid gt have been killed Was mine 20846 Killed ns daemon pid 20846 have been killed Was mine WHKKKKKEKKKKKKKKEKKEKKKKKKKKEKEKEKEKEKEKKKKKKRKEKRKEKEEEN AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 25 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Execute AnyMediaNBEM sh to set the envi ronment Nkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You have the installation logfile in lt Server path gt tmp EM_Install log Installation of lt LuANY16S gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 5 was successful lt Server side installation gt 2 2 1 2 Client side installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia client side Step Procedure 49 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed cdrom or disk 5O Type Install_AMEMR15 and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved xPre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the applica tion please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 runs on SUN SPARC So laris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus se curity and Y2000 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 0
264. n ObjectStore includes shared libraries For Ob jectStore applications and utilities to work the dynamic linker must be able to find them The recommended arrangement is to have symbolic links in usr lib to the shared libraries If you choose not to make these links then you will have to instruct all ObjectStore users to add lt ObjectStore path gt sunpro 1lib to their LD LIBRARY PATH environment variable Do you want to create links to ObjectStore li braries in usr lib yes 31 Press Return Since you have requested a File database con figuration you must give a pathname for the transaction log file Where do you want to put the transaction log 32 Type a valid path for instance lt ObjectStore path gt transac tion log where the package files must be placed and press Return press Return to select default You have configured this machine to run an Ob jectStore server The server s transaction log 1s in lt Transaction log path gt Do you want to proceed yes 33 Press Return AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 2 19 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe Writing configuration files and initializing the server please wait e e e A 990423 111330 ObjectStore Release 5 0 Service Pack 3 Database Server ObjectStore includes a server daemon which must be running for any application to access an Ob jectStore database It is recommended that
265. n Password Connection Connection State Not Connected Connect Figure 5 8 NE Name Information Window This window includes of 6 tabs m NE Details cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 m NE View cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 page 5 21 m NE Synchronization cf Chapter 5 3 2 2 page 5 46 m NE Inventory Data cf Chapter 5 3 2 3 page 5 49 Timing Source Control cf Chapter 5 3 2 4 page 5 52 m Date amp Time cf Chapter 5 3 2 5 page 5 55 5 3 2 1 NE View The purpose of this tab of the NE Name Information window is to provide a simple graphical representation of the NE shelves in case of multiple shelves AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 21 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee Complete the following procedure to display the shelf view Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab New View NE Details NE View synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing source Control Date amp Tire Shelf 1 Figure 5 9 NE Name Information Window Tab NE View lt is possible to navigate to the different shelves with a single click on the appropriate box Shelf 1 gt Shelf View window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 23 MDS2 MDS2B gt MDS2 MS2B Shelf View window
266. n NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot format iods1 1 shelf slot e g iods1 1 2 4 for working IO DS1s and iods1p shelf e g iodsp1 1 for the protection lIO DS1 Possible values iods1 1 1 5 for working IO DS1 iods1p 1 for protection IO DS1 Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information maven Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value IODS1 Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible values are FAC 100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLE and ECI codes Operation amp Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot Protection This state can be changed by the operator as long as the cir cuit pack is not inserted Default state for iods1 Not Re quired with the exception of iods1p whose default is Re quired The Apply button is available only if the IO DS
267. n alphabetical list of all configuration parameters that are used with AEM NB R1 5 m Detailed information about each parameter These configuration parameters are distributed in three configuration files as fol lows AnyMediaNBEMR 1 5 cfg for variables used by the AnyMedia servers m AnyMedia ini and SystemPreferences ini for variables used by the GUI Only the configuration parameters the AnyMedia administrator can modify are ex plained in this chapter modify these configuration variables with caution as they may adversely affect the correct operation of the application To modify the other configuration parameters stored in the configuration files please contact with Lu cent Technologies TCL 2 3 2 AnyMedia Server Configuration Pa rameters The following table provide an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia servers AEM NB R1 5 2 44 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning ee Configuration Man agement Settings OAM Settings 363 211 402 Table 2 3 Configuration Parameters AnyMediaNBEM cfg file configuration parameter name CM directoryNVDS gt NOTE description NVDS files location This files store informa tion in such a way as to survive indefinite peri ods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are store in the NVDS directory and hence are the param eter values that will be used on subsequen
268. n of cleared alarm s start and end Alarm s synchronization start and end Periodical deletion of cleared alarms Manual clear manual acknowledge The user identification that performs these actions is also logged m System internal events log Exception conditions of the AMS m Autonomous report log Raise automatic clear update of every alarm 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms By default alarms with cleared status are maintained for at least three days including the current day in the database This value and can be configured by the user via the system variable AM minimumClearPeriod in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaNBEM cfg and is an integer multiple in days The default value is 3 days The AEM NB performs a periodical deletion of the alarms with cleared status that exceed the specified time This is done during the night period in low load hours AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 9 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Alarm Monitoring The AEM NB provides a process to monitor and display all alarms stored in the database Using this system the Alarm Viewer the user is able to see many dif ferent alarm attributes such as Alarm Type Severity Status Summary and the date and time when the alarm was raised Via this tool the user can perform ac tions e g acknowledge clear for some of these alarms In this chapter you will find the following information Instruc
269. n only appears if above answer was y What is the base path of Netscape q 69 Type the path where the Netscape release 4 5 is installed on the system and press Return Netscape version is correct Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent W W Enter selection q 70 Type an user group number AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 33 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Le 71 72 73 14 79 2 34 Issue2 09 99 User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected What is the AnyMediaNBEM Server Host lt de fault gt q Type the host name where the AnyMedia AEM NB servers were installed and press Return press Return to select default WWal tg What is the URL for Broad Band Manager http www lucent com q Type a valid URL where the broad band manager is placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Login for CutThrough functionallity q Type a valid login and press Return Password for CutThrough functionallity q Type a valid password and press Return Code for the representation of names of lan guages Refer to ISO 639 1988 E F for more informa tion 1 da Danish 2 de German T o3 fr French 4 it Italian 5 zh Chinese 6 es Spanish 7 en English Enter selection q Type your language code and pr
270. n proceed with Step 6 The following errors will stop the download process m NE does not match login and password The AEM NB returns oper ation failed to the AEM NB NE detects that the side switch to the standby COMDAC is not pos sible e g 2nd COMDAC not present as the NE R1 5 does not sup port SW Download in simplex mode and refuses the SW Download operation If the download of the data fails an alarm is issued and manual inter vention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to back out the partial load duplex configuration see Chapter 5 5 2 page 5 116 m If the software program is not installed successfully on the standby COMDAC In duplex configuration an alarm will be sent to the AEM NB and manual intervention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 5 115 Configuration Management Provisioning NE Software Upgrade ee write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to remove the downloaded copy see Chapter 5 5 2 page 5 116 5 5 2 Program Copy Overview This function is used to copy a new loaded software from the currently active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC During normal operation both COMDACS should have the same software version So the software copy should always be the next step after software download Du
271. nager AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 23 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management Le 6 4 1 Port Test Purpose By means of a port test you are able to run a series of self diagnostic routines for a particular port on a specified AP Procedure Proceed as follows to start a port test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Start the port test You have the following options to do this a Via the Network Browser and the Main Menu Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP gt User Port Start the test by selecting Test Manager gt Physical Port Test from the menu bar b Via the Network Browser and the Cursor Menu Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP gt User Port Start the test by selecting Physical Port Test from the cursor menu c Via the TL1 Command Line Interface Enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 8 page 5 121 Staging parameter Command code blocks Please refer to the AMAS R1 2 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc Comment Port Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type Physical Port id is displayed during the test execu tion 2 Wa
272. navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit single row selection or delete single or multiple row selec tion the corresponding Logical TO s through the use of the Edit Logical T0 or Delete Logical TO buttons see be low m Physical Port id Identifies the port within the applica tion pack Format m2drop shelf slot port Possible values m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 The following entries are available only if a port is already cross connected not yet implemented for R1 5 VRT VB id shows the VRT VB id on which the service is provided only available if the physical port is cross connected VRT VB id format v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Logical TO id Indicates the Logical TO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the phys ical port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA m GSFN Generic Signalling Function that identifies the service type provided The following values are possible AC BRI DATA DPT DX4 N R EBS ETO4 FXO FX S T 1 2 3 5 LR NO 1 2 OCU 1 2 3 PLR 1 2 SW56 TD O S A B C D TO TO4 EM4 C H FX O P 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H Unknown The Add Logical TO button provides access to the Logical TO window In this case the Physical Port id will be trans ferred This button is enabled only if a physical port is se lecte
273. nd Clear Effects The alarms are re arranged according to the selected criteria Sorting Alarms Proceed as follows to sort the alarm display Step Procedure 1 Click on the header according to which the alarms are to be sorted Response The alarms are sorted according to the selected alarm field in ascending or descending order 2 Check if the list was sorted as desired Yes O K No Continue with step 3 3 Click again on the header to sort the list in the reverse order The sort can be in ascending or descending order each time the user clicks on the same header again the list is sorted the other way AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 17 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring i Ee 6 3 4 System Management Functions The general system management functions comprise the functions for file man agement for defining view options and for getting help These functions are con tained in the following menus m File m Views m Filters m Help 6 3 4 1 File In the file menu you can start the following actions m New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer m Reload Display a fresh copy of the current information shown in the window Print cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 m Close Close the active window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Same functionality as the Close button Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user 6 3 4 2 Views Summary For displaying
274. necessary to create modify delete users user groups and domains and the handling of controlled objects Chapter 5 Configuration Management Provisioning Describes the database and software management the default system configuration parameters and the provisioning and service activation the inventory management clock synchronization management and protection switching Chapter 6 Fault Management Maintenance Describes alarms and events how to use the Alarm Viewer how to perform tests and trouble clearing procedures Appendix Describes the Data Communications Network DCN configurations Abbreviations and Acronyms Lists all abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual Glossary Defines special terms used in this manual Index Alphabetical index to quickly search for paragraphs in the manual which provide more information on a certain keyword AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 XI About this Document Conventions Used 4 Conventions Used Numbering Cross References Keyword Blocks Abbreviations Commands Trademarks Lucent Technolo gies Trademarks Trademarks of Other Companies XII Issue2 09 99 The following are terms used in this USM that may have a different meaning than the general or common use of the term m Inthe AEM NB the term access means that the system provides the pri mary service interface for the customer to enter the network m Theterm plug in is generally used for circuit pac
275. needs for the router are the following Meer ae m X 25 interface functionality encapsulation window size etc m Protocols and encapsulations m PVC and SVC characteristics If SVCs are used the router is responsible for establishing and releasing the SVC m P addresses for IP routing routing tables m Ethernet media The initial provisioning of a router bridge is typically performed by a VT100 ANSI terminal connected to a RS 232C port A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Network Element On the AnyMedia NE the local LAN port must be configured The initial provision ing has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI NB LAN or RS 232C The NE IP address the default router address and the subnet mask of the NE local LAN port must be configured How to use TL1 commands to con figure the NE is shown in the next example The default router address will be the IP address of the X 25 router on NE side set ip shelf 135 88 4 2 defrouter 135 88 17 1 submask 255 255 240 0 Once the communication with the element manager is established via X 25 the remote operations on the NE can be executed as if a connection via LAN were present A 6 2 3 Element Manager Server Configura tion The element manager server configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 3 page A 7 The default router will be the X 25 router on AEM NB side AEM NB R1 5 A 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Data Communications N
276. no matter what the conditions of the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only are Full Backup This copies a complete file system or directory G Generic Signaling Function GSFN This defines the signaling interface for a provisioned distribution port It is part of the TO object data associated with each port Typical values for the GSFN are 2LS 2 wire loop start and 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originat ing side Global Program This defines the information presentation to the user according to the user s preferred language and customs A global program is one that has been internationalized and can be localized GSI This is an intelligent terminal which may be a laptop PC that supports Graphical User Interface GUI software and the TL1 protocol interface to the AnyMedia Access System GSI NB The Graphical System Interface for narrowband services This is a Windows 95 based PC which uses TL1 com mands for the management of AnyMedia Network Elements GUI The Graphical User Interface of the AnyMedia Element Manager System H Host A machine where one or more modules are installed Hub or Multiport Repeaters This have 8 12 16 or more ports With their help multiple devices with 10BASE T interface can be connected to a single LAN They have at least one additional port for connecting an additional segment of a LAN AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 GL 5 Glossary he Incremental Backu
277. nstall AEM NB from Your System 3 20 3 5 Print out Reports 3 21 3 6 Backup and Restore 3 23 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Databases 3 23 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore 3 25 3 6 3 Backup Archive and Restore Procedures 3 27 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules 3 28 3 7 Log Management 3 32 3 7 1 Different Log Types 3 32 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs 3 32 3 1 0 Log Viewer Window 3 803 3 8 System Variables 3 38 4 User Management 4 1 4 1 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 4 2 4 2 1 Create User 4 2 4 2 2 Modify User 4 4 4 2 3 Delete User 4 6 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create Domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify Domains 4 11 4 3 3 Delete Domains 4 14 4 4 User Groups 4 17 4 4 1 Create User Groups 4 1 7 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 V arr Contents 4 4 2 Modify User Groups 4 22 4 4 3 Delete User Groups 4 26 4 5 Controlled Objects 4 28 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects 4 28 5 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 1 5 1 Overview 5 1 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R1 5 5 1 5 2 Configuration Manager Window 5 8 5 2 1 Network Browser 5 9 5 2 2 Menu Bar 5 9 523 Status Bar 5 11 5 2 4 Cursor Menu 5 12 5 3 Equipment Configuration 5 14 5 3 1 Add an NE 5 16 5 3 2 Edit View of Configuration Data 5 21 5 3 3 Delete NE 5 67 5 4 Service Provisioning 5 68 5 4 1 Edit Network Interface d ra 5 4 2 Logical DS1 List 5 7 6 5 4 3 Creation of VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 Cross Connection 5 81 5 4 4 Change Voice Frequency Data Enhanceme
278. nt VFDE for TR 303 VRTs 5 88 5 4 5 Edit VRT VB Logical Feeder 5 88 5 4 6 Delete VRT VB Logical Feeder 5 89 5 4 7 Add VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 90 5 4 8 Edit VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 112 5 4 9 Delete VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 112 5 5 NE Software Upgrade 5 113 5 5 1 NE Software Download 5 113 5 5 2 Program Copy 5 116 5 6 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS 5 117 5 6 1 Data Backup 9 118 5 6 2 Data Restore 5 119 AEM NB R1 5 VI Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Contents 5 7 NE Reset 5 120 5 8 TL1 Cut Through 5 121 5 9 Fiber Reach 5 122 5 9 1 Start a Fiber Reach Session 5 123 5 9 2 Add a Host 3 123 59 3 Delete a Host 9 124 6 Fault Management and Maintenance 6 1 6 1 Overview 6 1 6 2 Alarm Management Ort 6 2 1 Overview 6 1 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information 6 2 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User 6 3 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data 6 7 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms 6 8 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment 6 8 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms 6 8 6 2 8 Alarm Data Synchronization 6 9 6 2 9 AEM NB Alarm Log Handling 6 9 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms 6 9 6 3 Alarm Monitoring 6 10 6 3 1 General 6 10 6 3 2 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 10 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions 6 11 6 3 4 System Management Functions 6 18 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions 6 21 6 4 Test Management 6 23 6 4 1 Port Test 6 24 6 4 2 AP Card Test 6 26 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Sche
279. obtained from the NE and it will be automatically updated Possible values are Sync and Async Autonomous Check boxes indicate autonomous output states Outputs States The Get button can be used to show the current autono mous output states of the NE 3 Use the Label button in the pane Configuration to change the Sync State lf the Sync State is Sync the label says Resync If the Sync State is Async the label says Sync 4 Use the Resync button in the pane Alarms to re synchronize the alarm synchronization state 5 Use the Label buttons Enable Disable to modify the alarms and envi ronmental alarms Possible values for these labels are Enable if the alarms or platform alarms say Disable or Disable if the alarms or platform alarms say En able 6 Use the Get button to update the display of the autonomous output states AEM NB R1 5 5 48 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 2 3 NE Inventory Data This window provides NE inventory data Procedure Complete the following procedure to get the inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt NE Inventory Data via the Menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab NE Inventory Data this step is not necessary if the NE Name Inform
280. ocument the client will be the AEM NB and a server in the context of this document the server will be the AnyMedia Access System for Narrow Band Side Switching This refers to the operation of deactivating the active core entity and activating the standby core entity COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs Software Download The transport of the information required to upgrade update a given NE s generic program SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is responsible for setting up this service System AnyMedia EM software It provides a set of services allowing an operator to manage the AnyMedia NE System Failure Any problem that prevents the EM system from continuing to work eee T TO This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DSO 64 kbps service or facil ity T1 This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TAS Terminal Access Server This adapts local area networks LAN to wide area networks WAN TASs have the ability to integrate remote net work elements in a local network TASs support different LAN protocols e g Ethernet and WAN protocols e g PPP TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A crossing of a parameter threshold that is generally considered to be a transient condition TELNET Thi
281. oduction Figure 1 2 shows the system architecture of the integrated management mode TL1 AEM NB P TL1 Wie Figure 1 2 Integrated Management Mode The complete system and software architecture of the AEM NB is described in Chapter 1 3 page 1 7 AEM NB R1 5 1 6 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture 1 3 System and Software Architecture 1 3 1 Functional Groups The AEM NB software architecture is built with a number of components that can be grouped in the following distinct functional groups 1 NE Management Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Test Management Performance Management 2 General Components Components for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM Common Servers 3 Software Platform Software bus Repository third party libraries Graphical User Interface GUI 5 Northbound Interface Southbound Interface Figure 1 3 shows the six functional groups The shadowed blocks are part of the AEM NB General NE Management Components Northbound Equipment Service Alarm Test Performance Common S Southbound Interface OAM comp Interface Software Platform aoe Software bus Repository third party libraries Hardware Platform SUN Solaris Figure 1 3 AEM NB Functional Groups AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 7 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee 1 3 1 1 NE
282. ogies which provides an interface between TL1 messages and CORBA methods EM Application A group of one or more modules that offers related functionality EM Domain An assigned collection of Controlled Objects EM Task This represents a subset of the management functions supported by EM applications EM User An entity defined via login name that can be assigned at least to an EM user group EM User Group A logical group of EM users enabled to access one or more domains Permissions to access domains applica tions and tasks are administered on an EM user group basis Embedded Operations Channel EOC A duplicated DSO data link dedicated for exchange operations messages between the LDS and RDT AEM NB R1 5 GL 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Glossary eee F Fault Case For some faults e g DCN failure normal working conditions need to be re established within certain time limits These are fault cases that are taken into account Fault Management For detecting displaying storing filtering and routing fault alarm data Feeder DS1 Ports These are the DS1 circuits that are used to provide virtual remote terminals or INA virtual bank feeder facilities and are provided by IO _DS1 circuit packs in the AnyMedia Access System The DS1 port numbers are included as part of the AlDs for these feeder DS1 ports Forced Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch
283. oids or reduces manual work Recovery processes vary depending on the type of failure that occurred the struc tures affected and the type of recovery If no files are lost or damaged recovery may amount to no more than restarting an instance If data has been lost recov ery requires additional steps such as database restore using a previous backup AEM NB recovery mechanisms are initiated mainly by the following situations m NE software crash m AEM NB crash Communication between AEM NB and a NE is interrupted In the case of a NE crash the AEM NB configures NEs in accordance with the in ternal state of the AEM NB database In the event of a AEM NB crash or an inter ruption in communication the AEM NB downloads the current NE configuration from the NE to its database AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 1 23 Functional Description Working with AEM NB ee Interactions Faults software or hardware the cause of which the AEM NB cannot eliminate it between Operator self by means of a recovery mechanism must then be handled by the user The and AEM NB AEM NB supports this The AEM NB first displays the fault on the user interface The user then initiates appropriate measures to clear the fault and or to maintain network operation This includes access to faulty network units and the redirection of the network traffic The AEM NB supports both Initiation of Main Sometimes additional maintenance actions are necessary
284. ollows to start an AP card test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Start the AP card test You have the following options to do this a Via the Network Browser and the Main Menu Select the AP you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP Start the test by selecting Test Manager gt AP Test from the menu bar b Via the Network Browser and the Cursor Menu Select the AP you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt AP Start the test by selecting AP Test from the cursor menu c Viathe TL1 Command Line Interface Enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 8 page 5 121 Staging parameter Command code blocks Note Use the value all for the Access Identifier AID Please refer to the AMAS R1 2 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc Comment AP Card Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type is displayed during the test execution 2 Wait until the AP Card Test Result window cf Figure 6 10 page 6 27 appears and view the test result AEM NB R1 5 6 26 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management Test Result 363 211 402 The AP Card Test Result window shows the test results of a se
285. omous output reports generated by the NEs Application Group of one or more modules that offer related functionality Applicatios Pack AP This is a circuit pack which provides the line side interface functionality for POTS SPOTS ISDN or special service circuits Each AP handles 24 or 32 lines POTS SPOTS COIN and special services or 16 lines ISDN There can be up to 16 APs in an AnyMedia Access System shelf Archive Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up AUDIT Trail A subset of all log messages A record showing who has accessed an Anymedia EM and what operation was per formed during a given period of time AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 GL 1 Glossary B B b wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the ring wire Backup Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corrup tion BB Broad Band Blinking Alarm An alarm which is continuously changing its status raised clear raised clear Bridge A network layer device that passes packets between two or more network segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is con nec
286. on of a VRT VB Logical Feeder T1 from a VRT VB a Aaddition Deletion of a Logical Line Subscriber TO to from a VRT VB Edition of a Logical Line Subscriber T0 of a VRT VB Alarm The Alarm Management provides the following functionality features Management m Integrated display of all the alarms The AEM NB provides a common window alarm viewer to show all alarms reported by the managed NEs or generated by the management system itself The display shows all the information pertaining to the alarm including alarm type severity service affecting indication date time of oc currence and clearing m Alarm Display Filters lt is possible to filter the items shown in the alarm viewer for instance to see only the critical alarms m Alarm Notification to User The user is informed by visual and audible alerts when a new alarm has been reported to the AEM NB Clearing of Alarms Alarms in the management system will automatically be cleared when the faults are removed at the source such as in the NEs or in the platform The alarm information will contain the date and time of alarm clearance m Acknowledged Alarms The operator can acknowledge a raised alarm alarm still active but being investigated The AEM NB registers the time at which an alarm changes its status from raised to acknowledged and separately from acknowledged to cleared It is also possible for an alarm to go directly from the raised to the cleared stat
287. onfiguration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration nl Ne ginformation a NE Details NE View Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing source Control Date amp Time l Provisioned Timing Reference Timing Sync Mode Loop Timed Primary Source dsi 1 1 1 Secondary Source ds1 1 2 1 Line Code Framing Format Active Timing Reference Active Timing Sync Source Get Figure 5 23 Timing Source Control Window This window provides the operator with the facilities needed to configure the NE timing source Three menu buttons are available Synchronization Mode Refer ence Source and Protection Source Parameters Buttons Description Synchroniza This option menu displays the current Synchronization tion Mode Mode Possible values Free Running Loop Timed External Clock External DS1 This option menu can also be used to change the Synchronization Mode Only after changing the mode the next two fields Primary Source and Secondary Source are available Primary Source This option menu is available only if the Synchronization Mode is Loop Timed The Primary Source working and optionally the Secondary Source standby can be se lected Possible values any of the available feeders ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the source s of synchronization has been selected click on the Apply button to accept the change AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 53 Configuration Management P
288. onization 12 22 Fault Management The Fault Management supports the operator in detecting displaying localizing and logging any faults occurring in the managed network The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 Handling of alarm severities critical major minor m Receiving of autonomous alarm messages m Retrieving of alarms per system plug in unit application pack Retrieving of alarm and event logs from NE m e Initiation Evaluation of tests for fault analysis purposes AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 1 3 Functional Description Introduction A 1 2 2 3 Performance Management The Performance Management provides facilities for retrieving storing and print ing of the NE performance and data to ensure the quality of service 1 2 2 4 Security Management The Security Management functions which are based on UNIX control the ac cess to the AEM NB and to the managed NEs The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m AEM NB user administration m AEM NB user security profile m No additional NE login for current AEM NB user AEM NB access via login name and password Inactivity user session time out 1 2 3 Applications The AEM NB provides 6 applications which give access to the management func tionality as described in Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 The following applications are available m System A
289. onnected to a logical port that is provisioned for Foreign Exchange FX service it provides a ground start interface AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 69 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ELE The NE logical configuration supports a combined maximum of 672 TO records among all VRTs and VBs This number exceeds the total number of physical sub scriber lines that the system supports The physical ports of the AnyMedia Access System provide feeder DS1 connec tions and subscriber tip ring pairs The physical ports are associated with IO DS1 FAC100 circuit packs and APs respectively Service provisioning for VF Voice Frequency services requires that feeder and distribution ports be associated with a VRT VB through T1 and TO cross connec tions respectively and that TO provisioning data be entered for the desired ser vice Finally the required physical circuit packs must be equipped Figure 5 29 represents the composite provisioning data required to bring a single subscriber line into service on a TR 08 VRT v8dp 1 1 ds1 1 1 1 drop 1 1 1 v8fdr 1 a IO_DS1 Pack 1 Application U TR 08 VRT i Pack 1 i U J U 2 96 U T1 Cross Connection TO Cross Connection Figure 5 29 Provisioning Data for a TR 08 POTS Subscriber Line As mentioned before the AnyMedia Access System may contain 1 TR 303 VRT and or up to 20 TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs in any combination subject
290. or false to disable Default value true BROAD_BAND_URL the URL where the Broad Band application is located Broad Band Appli cation Settings Default value defined at installation time Cutthrough Set LOGTELNET login to connect to AnyMedia NB server for tings CutThrough purposes Default value defined at installation time AEM NB R1 5 2 48 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters ee configuration parameter name description PASSTELNET password to connect to AnyMedia NB server for CutThrough purposes Default value defined at installation time SERVER server host where the AnyMedia NB appli cation is running Default value defined at installation time Help Settings HELP_URL the URL where the help files are located Table 2 5 AnyMedia ini configuration file configuration parameter name description LV READLINES line number of server log messages read in Log Viewer Range of values 1 to 50 Default value 50 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 49 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters ee AEM NB R1 5 2 50 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Contents 3 1 Overview 3 2 System Access 3 2 1 Login to Operation System 3 2 2 Logout from Operation System 3 2 0 AEM NB Access Bar 3 2 3 1 Alarm Notification Icon 3 2 3 2 Help Icon 3 2 4 Capacity 3 3 General Information on Keyboard and Window
291. oration tool asks whether additional databases should be re stored Do you wish to restore from any additional incremental backups yes no Type no and press Enter After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental Restoration Procedure Before a certain incremental backup can be restored the previous full backups and possibly some previous incremental backups must be restored The procedure to restore an incremental backup is the same as the above de scribed procedure for a full backup except for the last Additional Incremental Backups step In that step the restore tool asks for a confirmation that all needed full backups which are a prerequisite for the incremental backup are present An swer this question affirmatively After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules Introduction This section gives you some examples for typical backup schedules and explains the backup level Backup Level Crucial for the understanding of the backup schedules is understanding the backup level The backup level is a number which is assigned by you to every backup you make Each time you make a new backup only those files are put on AEM NB R1 5 3 28 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Backup and Restore ee the back up media which were altered since the last backup with a lower backup level A backup
292. orer is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Windows 95 and Windows 98 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation Quality Management System The Quality Management System QMS for Lucent Technologies Product Realization Center PRC Access has been registered to ISO 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas DNV since June 1993 ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide It is a model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Telefax to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH How Are We Doing Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation Please use a copy of this page for your comments 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas C a S S 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document Make it more brief concise Add more step by step procedures tutorials Add more troubleshooting information Make it less technical Add more better quick reference aids Improve the index Improve the overview introduction Improve the tables of contents Improve the organization structure Include more figures Add more examples Add more detail Uuuu OOUUOOUO Please provide details for t
293. ormation about packages un installation m inorder to does not affect the rest of the installed packages the package must be re installed in the same directory as the previous one gt NOTE the pkgadd d command makes a temporal uncompressing on the var spool pkg directory Therefore you must sure enough free disk space in this location If you like uncompress in other location the command pkgtrans package _name pkg new_location package_name shall be executed previously for instance pkgtrans LuOX23RT pkg tmp LuOX23RT In this type of installation is necessary to comply with the packaged dependencies showed in the following table Table 2 2 Packages dependencies To install the following package must be installed previously OrbixNames OrbixMT OrbixTalk OrbixMT OrbixWeb jre AnyMedia Serv OrbixMT ew OrbixTalk OrbixNames LUMOS ObjectStore RogueWave AnyMedia Client OrbixWeb jre symantec reportPro Netscape not included into the AnyMedia distribution Help none Traces and inputs in this type of installation and in a full installation are similar Only the following differences could be found AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 37 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 2 38 mw When an installation starts the package checks if a previous installation will make with the same package version If no previous package Is found the following message will appear OK No p
294. ort so that clients can communicate with it m OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next one The first can be modified at installation time to a value between 1024 and 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN IP multicast addresses Using OrbixTalk all communications takes place using multicast addresses The range of IP multicast addresses used by OrbixTalk is 31 with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is configurable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 AEM NB R1 5 2 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia Client lt GUI gt LUMOS Net work Element and OS This parameter is needed for installing the AnyMedia Cli ent The install AMEMR15 script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment At least the system environment variable PATH must include the paths usr bin usr sbin and usr ucb for instance export PATH PATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 2 2 Installation Procedure General The AEM NB R1 5 distribution includes an installation script called Install_AMEMR15 which shall be used in a full installation it includes all pack ages stored on the distribution media Also you can make individual package in Stallations using the pkgadd command In this case you must be ver
295. otection from Unauthorised Access By default there are 3 user groups the administrator maintenance and monitoring user group Further groups can be added User Groups Table 1 1 provides an overview of the access permissions the user groups should have Access Rights Table 1 1 Assignment of User Groups to Applications Tasks Application Task Start up Shutdown Monitoring User Group System Administrator Administration Naane aor User Administration Access Policy Administrator and Profiling Management Domain Management Administrator Log Viewer Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Autonomous Report Alarm Viewer Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring 1 26 Issue2 09 99 Clear NE Creation Equipment and Configuration Manager Service Provisioning View Test Cut through BroadBand EM BroadBand EM AEM NB R1 5 Administrator Maintenance Administrator Maintenance Administrator Maintenance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Administrator Administrator Maintenance Monitoring 363 211 402 Functional Description Network Configuration 1 5 Network Configuration The network configuration depends on the user applications The most probable configurations are described below and illustrated in Figure
296. other boxes show the possible menus that can be reached by using the Menu bar or the cursor menu The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened Examples To open the COMDAC Shelf Protection window proceed as follows m Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt COMDAC via the Network Browser and select Equipment gt Protection via the Menu bar or Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt via the Network Browser and select Protection via the cursor menu AEM NB R1 5 5 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Timing Source Control Date amp Time User Por User Port to Physical DS1 Logical DS1 to Logical TO window Service window Service Provisioning Provisioning cf Chapter 5 4 page 5 68 cf Chapter 5 4 page 5 68 C Object C Window can contain tabs C Set of related windows Figure 5 5 Screen Navigation for Equipment Configuration AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 15 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee 5 3 1 Add an NE The following steps are necessary to add an NE m Create NE m Assign Domain m Connect NE Assumptions To add an NE the following assumptions must be fulfilled m The PC based GSI Graphical System Interface is used to set the NE ina state where NVDS Non Volatile Data Storage is populated with the mini mum values i e target id IP address user id m All those
297. other tasks needs a deeper description Access Policy Management provides the functionality to m create modify delete AEM NB users m create modify delete AEM NB user groups m create modify delete AEM NB domains m create modify delete assignments between AEM NB users and AEM NB user groups m create modify delete access assignments between AEM NB user groups and applications tasks m create modify delete access assignments between AEM NB user groups and domains modify assignments between domains and controlled objects Domain Management provides the functionality to modify assignments between domains and controlled objects NE Creation provides the functionality to m create modify delete controlled objects with Type NE 10 Click Applications amp Tasks 11 Select one or more applications the user group shall has access to in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add The corresponding tasks are displayed for selection 12 Select one or more tasks the user group shall has access to in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add 13 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 4 2 page 4 22 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 21 User Management User Groups ee 4 4 2
298. ough 5 8 TL1 Cut Through Overview Cut through GUI independence Procedure How to start a TL1 session 363 211 402 The AEM NB provides the operator with a command line to a TL1 transaction language 1 session with any NE Using this command line the user can type any TL1 command send these commands to a selected NE and get the responses to the requests as well as all the autonomous outputs sent by the NE TL1 used for the provisioning maintenance and administration of the AnyMedia Access System is an ASCll based command language This cut through interface is used by remote AEM NB craft personal when the GUI does not support certain TL1 commands The AEM NB will provide the inde pendence between the cut through interface and the GUI interface To open a cut through interface with an NE the operator must provide the connec tion information Login and Password defined in the NE Name Information win dow cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 When the AEM NB receives the request to open a cut through session it opens the TCP IP connection with the selected NE using a new virtual connection to avoid conflicts with the current AEM NB GUI session Then the operator will man age the cut through session through the use of TL1 commands The AEM NB GUI behavior but not necessarily the performance is not affected by any simultaneous cut through connection running on the platform The operator using the AEM NB GUI need not have
299. p This copies new files and files that have changed since a previous backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incremental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level Inhibit Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch irrespec tive of the conditions of the active unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only Internationalization This is the process of isolating the language and customs dependent code in a computer program from the lan guage independent code The term internationalization is often abbreviated as 78n IO DS1 Pack IO_DS1 This provides four DS1 interfaces to accommodate telephony via standard TR 08 mode TR 303 and INA network interfaces IO_DS1 Circuit Packs Each circuit pack contains four feeder DS1 port circuits together with the circuitry needed to interface with DS1 sig nals metallic feeder IP Addresses These are distributed according to the worldwide or local configuration The IP address is used in ISO layer 3 A LAN contains tables for making an assignment between MAC address and IP address T L Level 1 Applications The minimum set of server applications that have to run together to provide the minimum functionality of the Any Media NB EM These applications must exist before the Level 2 Application can be started
300. package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 31 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure E SeSe Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuANYl6en gt y n 66 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Help as lt LuANY16en gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuANY16en 1log Installation of lt LuANY16en gt was successful AnyMedia Client Processing package instance lt LUANY16C gt from Installation 2 32 Issue 2 lt tmp lucent_pkg 5 gt AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Cli ent sparc lt LuANY16C_X Yc gt n kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkxkx ER AnyMedia Element Manager Tok c 1999 Lucent Technologies n kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkk OK No previous package LUANY16C have been found Where should AnyMediaNBEM GUI be installed opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM_R1 5 GUI
301. panying documentation and information on the unit system x Calibrations special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carried out documented and archived m Only use tested and virus free diskettes AEM NB R1 5 XIV Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 About this Document Related Documentation TN Donot place the shelves on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 6 2 1 Safety Symbols and Labels All safety instructions have a uniform appearance They include a signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and cause of the danger the consequences of ignoring the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to minimize the danger In some safety instructions a warning symbol is placed underneath the signal word Classification There are five classes of safety instructions Danger Warning Caution Im portant and Notice The classification is shown in the following table DANGER Serious injury is definite or likely WARNING Serious injury is possible CAUTION Minor injury is definite likely or possible or material damage to the product
302. played in the table of the Log Viewer File gt Print gt Print Preview Print a screenshot of the list of log messages File gt Close The selected Log Viewer window is closed Other open Log Viewer windows stay open File gt Exit Close all Log Viewer windows AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 35 System Management Log Management ee Table 3 25 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function Options gt Default Type Set a new default type which will be displayed when the next Log Viewer window Is opened Help gt On Window Display help for Log Viewer Help gt Index Display help index Actions The following table lists all actions you can perform in the Log Viewer window Table 3 26 Actions in the Log Viewer Window display a certain log select the desired log type with the pull The log of the selected type and date is type of a specific down control Type and the date of inter displayed in the Log Viewer table date est with the pull down control Date and press Apply view different log start another Log Viewer with File gt A new Log Viewer window displays the types or dates si New and set the desired Type or Date selected log type and date multaneously change the log type select Options gt Default Type Inthe The selected log type is displayed by displayed at start up window which opens cf Figure 3 13 default whenever a new Log Viewer win click on the new default log type and dow
303. ple of an AEM NB Window Convention The following font is used when a button is mentioned e g Close The following elements are used within windows m Pushbutton Each pushbutton is provided with a designation describing its function If you click on the pushbutton the function will be executed If you click on a pushbutton the designation of which is followed by three dots e g Help a window will open where you may set further parameters Push buttons which alter their designation depending on context are also called Label buttons m Check Box Check boxes have the same function as an on off switch Each time you click on a check box you will change its toggle status A pressed check box containing a check mark means that the option at this position is se lected AEM NB R1 5 3 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows ee Radio Button Radio buttons have the same function as check boxes with the difference that of various radio buttons of the same group only one can be pressed at a time As with a radio set a set button will pop out when you press the next one in m Text Box Text boxes are used to input text via the keyboard m List Box A list box contains read only data in list form To scroll through a list you have to use the scroll bar at the right of the list box m Drop Down List Box A drop down list box allows you to enter data by selecting an ent
304. plex Configura For the following description it is assumed that the NE is configured in duplex con tion figuration Procedure Complete the following procedure to copy the new software from the active COM DAC to the standby COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser an Program Copy via cursor menu or select Equipment gt Program Copy via the Menu bar The Program Copy window pops up NE Name nes Copy Non Volatile Program Store From working COMDAC Standby COMDAC Slot Slot To Sw Version Sw Version x Close Program Copy Unsuccessful The NE is not provisioned for duplex Figure 5 44 Program Copy Window This is a dialog window requesting information from the operator to con tinue There are two panes titled Working COMDAC and Standby COM DAC showing the corresponding slot number and SW versions used in each of the COMDACs AEM NB R1 5 5 116 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS a nnn Slot Identifies which COMDAC is where e g Working COMDAC in slot 1 and Standby in slot 2 SW Version Obtained from the NE The SW version of the working COMDAC will be taken as the NE SW version 2 Press OK to start the software copy An In Progress window pops up Program Copy from COMDAC 1 to COMDAC 2 in Progress 3 Wait until this process is finished 5 6 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS Overview T
305. pplication Packs and GSFNs 5 110 5 4 8 Edit VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 112 5 4 9 Delete VRT VB Logical TO Subscriber 5 112 5 5 NE Software Upgrade 5 113 5 5 1 NE Software Download 5 113 5 0 2 Program Copy 5 116 5 6 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS 5 117 5 6 1 Data Backup 5 118 5 6 2 Data Restore 5 119 5 7 NE Reset 5 120 5 8 TL1 Cut Through 5 121 5 9 Fiber Reach 5 122 5 9 1 Start a Fiber Reach Session 5 123 5 9 2 Add a Host 5 123 5 9 3 Delete a Host 5 124 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 III BE OOOO OOOO O Contents AEM NB R1 5 5 IV_ Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 1 Overview This chapter describes the Configuration Manager application of the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB It ad dresses the following topics m Overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access System m Explanation of Menu bar and Network Browser m Screen navigation Equipment Configuration and Service Provisioning 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R1 5 The architecture of the AnyMedia Access System R1 5 is a single shelf with the following main components as shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 2 m Upto6lO DS1 packs Upto two Common Data and Control COMDAC packs m One Craft Test Unit CTU pack m Upto 16 Application Packs APs 32 line 2WCF Programmable PROG2W a k a POTS 32 512 a k a PROG22 32 line 2WCF POTS only a k a POTS32
306. provisioning deactivation consists of the setting of those parameters needed to provide service to or disconnect service from an individual end cus tomer For Distribution Ports such parameters include those that specify a TO cross connection between a Logical TO on a VRT VB Virtual Remote Terminal Virtual Bank and an end customer s physical port and the setable parameters within the port Service provisioning is typically initiated by a service order al though reprovisioning is sometimes also needed for maintenance purposes or for reconfiguration of an existing network e g load balancing Figure 5 28 page 5 69 shows a conceptual diagram of the cross connections be tween the physical DS1 and subscriber ports of the AnyMedia Access System and the VRTs VBs The AnyMedia Access System supports m upto one TR 303 VRT m upto 20 TR 08 VRTs m and up to 20 INA VBs in any combination not exceeding 20 feeder DS1s 4 DS1 feeders for each lO DS1 T1 cross connections provide feeder bandwidth to VRTs and VBs A maximum of 20 T1 cross connections can be created they are limited by the maximum num ber of DS1 feeder ports in the system AEM NB R1 5 5 68 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Logical BW Management Entities in the AnyMedia Access System Physical Distribution Port Circuits in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 Feeder 1 PLN 1 LLN CRV 2 VO DS1 LOG F
307. ps Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 17 Removing To remove assigned user groups from the selected domain select one or more User Groups user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 3 3 Delete Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a domain from the AEM NB Before removing a domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login Before deleting a domain the AEM NB ensures that there are no controlled objects assigned to this domain If this is the case the deletion request will be rejected After a domain deletion all related information will be removed from the AEM NB This does not include the devices NEs or any other type which are grouped in that domain or their information Furthermore the access permission will be automatically unassigned from the user groups that had access to this domain AEM NB R1 5 4 14 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management Domains ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 17 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administr
308. ps copied to the backup medium If an archive is made the log files are moved to the or Archives backup medium The files from which a backup or archive is done are shown in the table below The location of the files is relative to the main installation direc tory For changing default locations refer to Chapter 3 8 page 3 38 Table 3 14 Default File Names for Backup and Archive Backup Fails if Database File Directory File File doesn t exist Alarm database yes Configuration management database yes NE management database yes Security database yes Non volatile Data Storage NVDS no Log Files log directory no Default Locations When a backup is restored all files are restored to their original location When for Restored Data archives are restored they are copied into the directory restored relative to the main installation directory Restore One of Sev When more than one backup is placed on a tape and a particular one shall be re eral Backups from stored the name of this backup must be known The name can be determined by Tape using the tar command For example tar tvf dev rmt Omn Command Syntax In the following description of the commands square brackets e g c indicate optional parameters The pipe symbol indicates alternative options from which one has to be chosen e g INC FULL All parameters not enclosed in brackets are mandatory Each command is entered without enclosing parameters in brackets AEM N
309. ps up User Administration File view Help Figure 4 29 Window User Administration 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears H User Administration File view dministrator Maintenance Monitoring Delete View User group Successful Figure 4 30 User Groups Table 4 Select the user group which shall be deleted in the User Group Name field and click Delete gt NOTE The administrator user group is protected against deletion 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 27 User Management Controlled Objects 4 5 Controlled Objects 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information about existing con trolled objects The controlled object creation and deletion are not covered by this document For NE creation and deletion refer to Chapter 5 3 1 and Chapter 5 3 3 Before modifying the information about any controlled object the AEM NB admin istrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information about existing con trolled objects Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator After the login process is complete the Access Bar pops up Figure 4 31 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User Administratio File view Help Figure 4 32 Window User Administration
310. q When an input is provided the installation checks the path and the version of the application If the path is invalid the following message will appear ERROR Pathname does not exist And if the version is invalid Package lt Required Package_Name gt have been found but INSTALL PATH is not defined Package lt Required Package_Name gt have been found but with version lt Package_Version gt not valid for lt Package_Name gt In both cases the installation will prompt again for the required package m Also the path where the Orbix cfg file is located is request in the Orbix Names OrbixTalk and AnyMedia Servers packages installation after the request for the installation path of the OrbixMT the file will modified by both installations AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 2 39 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure Ee Where is Orbix cfg file located Orbix_path cfg q m Finally after the ObjectStore installation the user must execute the oscon fig server command in order to configure the ObjectStore daemon refer to steps 28 to 32 2 2 3 Cancel Installation There are two ways to cancel the installation as follows m internal cancellation when the Install_AMEMR15 or pkgadd com mand detect through information files or installation scripts that something is invalid m external cancellation if the administrator kill the process kill 9 or Ctrl C In bo
311. r mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM NB AEM NB R1 5 5 62 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration a nnn m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress 5 3 2 7 2 IO DS1 Protection Switching Overview The NE supports both protected and unprotected DS1 feeder interface opera tions i e the IO DS1 can be 1 N protected 1 lt N lt 5 or without a protection lO_DS1 pack IO DS1 pack protection is controlled by the active COMDAC via the Protection Control Bus The AEM NB cannot provision DS1 pack level protection It is automatically in voked when an FAC100 pack is plugged into the O DS1 protection slot Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for O DS1 Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser and Protection via the cursor menu or select Equipment gt Protection via the Menu bar The Shelf Protection window pops up 2 Click on tab O DS7 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 63 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Sh
312. r 4 3 1 page 4 8 To disable the access to one or more domains click Domains select one or more domains in the Domains Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The administrator user group shall be assigned access permissions to all domains and this access permissions shall not be modified To give the selected user group access to further applications click Applications amp Tasks select one or more applications in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 20 To disable the access to one or more applications click Applications amp Tasks select one or more applications in the Applications Assigned field and click Re move For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 20 gt NOTE The administrator user group shall be assigned access permissions to all applications and this access permissions shall not be modified gt NOTE lf the user select an application in the Applications Assigned field all tasks that are under it will be expanded in the Tasks Assigned and Tasks Not As signed fields To give the selected user group access to further tasks select one or more tasks in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 20 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 4 25 User Management User Groups Removing To disable the access to one or more tasks sele
313. ration window Table 3 8 System Administration Actions If you want to then start one or more applications select the applications which shall be started under Stopped and press Add shut down one or more applications select the applications to be shut down under Running and press Remove close the window press Close or select File gt Exit Start Shut down You may start or shut down more than one application at the same time To do so more applications click on all desired applications once Clicking on a selected application again de selects it AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 19 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown ee 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applica tions via Command Line The system can be configured at installation time to start up the server applica tions automatically on every reboot An administrator can start up or shut down server applications via a command line interface Commands for The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win Start Up and Shut dow to start up or shut down server applications Down Table 3 9 Commands for Start up and Shut down If you want to Type in a terminal window start up all AEM NB applications systemAdmin ALL start up the core AEM NB applications systemAdmin CORE shut down all AEM NB applications systemAdmin CLEAN 3 4 5 Deinstall AEM NB from Your System Deinstallation The AEM NB software can be deinstall
314. ration was accepted for otd Licence registration was accepted for otmsd Licence registration was accepted for otdsm WHKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKEKEKKEKKKKKKKEKKEKEKEKKKKKKRKKEKEKEKEEEN x INSTALLATION WARNINGS U For Orbix and OrbixTalk to be able to find Or bix cfg you must set the environment variable IT CONFIG PATH to its location ie lt OrbixMT path gt cfg Orbix cfg If the OrbixTalk binaries fail with the mes sage password invalid The licence install utility will need to be run manually Enter the following command lt OrbixMT path gt bin install_licence lt OrbixTalk path gt bin otd lt code gt OrbixTalk 1 2c02 is now successfully in stalled You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXTKRT 1log Installation of lt LuOXTKRT gt was successful AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 2 17 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure FFF EEE ee ObjectStore 5 0 In Processing package instance lt LuOSRT gt from stallation lt tmp lucent_pkg 6 gt ObjectStore 5 0 _SP3 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris 5 0_SP3 Run Time Enter install directory opt lucent OS50_SP3 q 27 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifyin
315. re ee Processing package instance lt LUuANY16S gt from lt tmp lucent_pkg 1 gt AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 server sparc LUANY16S_X Xc Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkx xAnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OK No previous package LuANY16S have been found xxxSelect an installation path for AnyMediaEM R1 5 server applications Enter install directory for the AnyMediaEM R1 5 opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM_R1 5 q 35 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default The installation path selected for AnyMedia EM R1 5 is lt Server path gt Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt Package lt LUOXTKRT gt OrbixTalk 1 2c02 have been found in lt OrbixTalk path gt Package lt LuUOXTKRT gt OTGateway 1 2c02 have been found in lt OrbixTalk path gt Package lt LUuOXNS gt OrbixNames Version 1 1c Run Time have been found in lt OrbixNames path gt Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 0 _SP3 Run Time have been found in lt ObjectStore path gt Package lt LULUMRT gt Lumos Build 5 run time have been found in lt Lumos path gt Package lt LUuRWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 have been found in lt RogueWave path gt Select owner and group for pac
316. ress m The forced switch is denied as the protecting slot is locked out m The manual switch is denied either because there is a higher protection switch active Inhibit Forced or because an automatic switch is already protecting that protected slot 5 3 2 8 Alarm Configuration Configuring of the alarm severities is only possible via the cut through inter face The corresponding TL1 commands are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System 5 3 3 Delete NE If the NE should not be managed by the AEM NB any longer it shall be deleted from the AEM NB database Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the All gt NE in the Network Browser and Delete NE via the cursor menu or select File gt Delete or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Delete via the Menu bar A Warning window pops up You are about to delete lt NE Name gt Do you want to continue If you select No the deletion of the NE is rejected Otherwise the NE will be deleted gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM NB database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM NB and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM NB is finished until the NE is cre ated and connected again AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 67 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning E SeSe 5 4 Service Provisioning Overview Service
317. revious package lt Package_Name gt have been found gt NOTE Refer to Type 2 and press Return on page 8 to see this trace In other cases the following messages will appear m When the same package was installed previously Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt mw When a package with the same architecture and version and different name was installed previously Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found Please use pkgrm lt Package_Version gt to delete previous version m When a package with the same architecture and name and different ver sion was installed previously Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found but with different version Package_Version than the new you want to in stall m When the same package was installed partially previously Previous partially installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt m When a package with the same architecture and version and different name was installed partially previously Previous partially installed package lt Package_Name gt version
318. ries of self diag nostic routines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its common circuitry AP Card test Result ME Name nes Slot else Card Type PROG Result List Figure 6 10 The AP Card Test Result Window The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 11 Meaning of the Text Fields in the AP Card Test Result Window Text Fields Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the Any string consisting of up to selected network element as 30 characters specified at NE creation time Slot The slot number of the AP be AP 1 AP 16 ing used Card Type Mnemonic used to identify the PROG2W PRCOIN and general type of function pro POTS32 vided AP card type Result List The port within the AP Port 1 Port 32 Physical Port id Result List The result of the test routines PASS or FAIL Result Click Close to dismiss the AP Card Test Result window AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 6 27 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management Ee 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Scheduling Side Switch and During the execution of a standby card test scheduling a COMDAC side switch Offline and off line diagnostics for the standby COMDAC or off line diagnostics for the Diagnostics protection feeder IO DS1 pack are performed Possible User The AEM NB provides the opportunity to the user to set up the periodicity and the Settings time of the day cf Table 6 12 page 6 28 to
319. rlined letter of the relevant menu to open the menu option and then entering the letter underlined in the desired menu option Table 6 4 File Menu N ew Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer Chapter 6 3 4 1 page 6 18 Display a fresh copy of the current informa Chapter 6 3 5 tion shown in the window Only alarms which page 6 21 match the filter criteria will be included Print Print all alarm items displayed in the cur Chapter 6 3 4 1 rently displayed table or save the items into page 6 18 an ASCII file Close Dismiss this window but without closing Chapter 6 3 4 1 other instances of the Alarm Viewer page 6 18 Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user Chapter 6 3 4 1 page 6 18 Table 6 5 Views Menu Select a view from the predefined views Chapter 6 3 4 2 AEM NB R1 5 6 12 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Table 6 6 Filters Menu Alarms for the last 24 hours Selection of filter criteria for Chapter 6 3 4 3 displaying alarm information page 6 19 Alarms for the last 24 hours Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s Critical Alarms not cleared Owned Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms Table 6 7 Actions Menu Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms their status Chapter 6 3 5 Acknowledge i will change to acknowledged page 6 21 Clear Clear all select
320. rmation in the repository includes Information m NE inventory for each NE the hardware identifiers and the software versions Equipment and Service provisioning data m History and security logs m External system communication parameters m AEM NB configuration data m Alarms cache 1 3 1 4 Graphical User Interface GUI Introduction The Java based GUI is responsible for putting up forms collecting user input commands and data and routing it on to the correct component It also receives data from the relevant process which it uses to update its display The GUI has di rect access to the services provided by the AEM NB through the ORB Functionality The GUI provides the following functionality features peau a Multi National Language Support Provides all user interface capabilities in English m Support TL1 messages Supports all TL1 messages for all NE products for dumb terminal access Allows direct input of TL1 messages In some markets direct input of TL1 messages may not be allowed and can be suppressed via the appropriate security permissions m 8 Online Help Provides access to online help which contains at least information on the operation of the AEM NB meaning of the buttons etc a Multiple windowing Provides multiple windowing for access to multiple NE information on a sin gle screen m Multiple user access Provides for multiple users access to the AEM NB at the same time Multi ple users may in
321. rovisioning Equipment Configuration A Parameters Buttons Description Secondary This option menu is available only if the Synchronization Source Mode is Loop Timed The Secondary Source standby can be selected Possible values any of the available feeders ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the source s of synchronization has been selected click on the Apply button to accept the change gt NOTE The secondary source must be different from the pri mary source Otherwise there is no protection avail able Line Code This option menu is available only if the Synchronization Mode is External DS1 Possible values B8ZS ZCS Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed click on the Apply button to accept the change Framing Format This option menu is available only if the Synchronization Mode is External DS1 Possible values ESF SF Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed click on the Apply button to accept the change Apply This button is available only when m Synchronization Mode has been changed m Synchronization Mode is Loop Timed and at least one source has been modified m Synchronization Mode is External DS1 and either the Line Code or Framing Format have been modified gt NOTE During the apply operation the Get and Switch but tons are disabled The whole subpane will be updated as result of the operation AEM NB R1 5 5 54 Issue2
322. ry from a list that drops down after clicking on the triangle on the right of the box m Spin Box A spin box only allows a limited set of discrete ordered input values You have to use the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the value Tab A window can contain a register of several tabs Clicking on a tab displays the corresponding contents in the window m Option Menu The option menu is used to set a certain option Its designation will indicate the option currently set Handling of the option menu is the same as for a menu Frequently Used The table below provides an overview of buttons which have the same function in Buttons every AEM NB window Table 3 5 Function of Frequently Used Buttons Button Function OK Applies changes window is closed Apply Applies changes window stays open for further edits Cancel Discards changes running operation is cancelled window is closed Close Discards changes window is closed Edit Opens an edit window for the displayed parameters AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 15 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows Le Frequently Used The table below provides an overview of menus which have the same function in Menus every AEM NB window Table 3 6 Function of Frequently Used Menus Menu Function File gt Print gt Print Table Prints the contents of text lists in the window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 File gt Print gt Print Pr
323. s Date 2 16 1999 Displayed Log Type Actions Apply Displayed Date 2 16 1999 a a E 1999 02 17 16 01 10 END_SUCCESS Start up Server Applications Log_APP 1999 02 17 16 01 10 EM START EM Start up Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP 1999 02 17 16 02 00 EM END_ERROR EM Start up Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP App 1999 02 17 16 02 00 EM START EM Shutdown Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP 1999 02 17 16 02 00 EM END_SUCCESS EM Shutdown Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP 1999 02 17 16 02 00 EM START EM Shutdown Server Applications Log_APP 1999 02 17 16 06 57 EM END_SUCCESS EM Start up Server Applications Log_APP 1995 02 17 16 06 57 EM START EM Start up Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP 1999 02 17 16 06 59 EM END_SUCCESS EM Start up Server Applications Usr_Admin_APP i J New Log Type Successful Figure 3 12 Log Viewer Meaning of Columns 3 34 Issue 2 09 99 The following table explains the meaning of the columns in the Log Viewer table Table 3 23 Column Information Displayed in the Log Viewer Table Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Meaning Date and time when the event was registered in the log file Format year month date hour minute second The user name of the user performing an action or EM The condition of a performed action to indicate whether it is the request or the response E g START END SUCCESS END_ERROR Uniq
324. s 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 3 2 Mouse 3 3 3 Different Aspects of the Cursor 3 3 4 Basics on Windows 3 3 5 Window Menu 3 3 6 Menu Bar 3 3 7 Cursor Menu 3 3 8 Workspace Manager 3 3 9 Workspace Menu 3 3 10 Controls in AEM NB Windows 3 4 Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 4 1 General on Applications 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications 3 4 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via GUI 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via Command Line 3 4 5 Deinstall AEM NB from Your System 3 5 Print out Reports 363 211 402 AEM NB R1 5 Q3 re N a N KA OO ve D a iN T on via on op ra op a op N a N Go a gt Go Si h S9 an s Sr a ho Go ak ho Go an 8 Go an N d9 Si N D aa o0 Go a o0 M M Q NO k Issue 2 09 99 3 I B OOOO OOOO TT Contents 3 6 Backup and Restore 3 23 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Databases 3 23 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore 3 25 3 6 3 Backup Archive and Restore Procedures Fer 3 6 3 1 Backup Procedure 3 27 3632 Archive Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 3 Restore Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 3 1 General 3 27 3 6 3 3 2 Full Restoration Procedure 3 28 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental Restoration Procedure 3 28 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules 3 28 3 6 4 1 Daily Cumulative Weekly Cumulative Backups 3 29 3 6 4 2 Daily Cumulative Weekly Incremental Backups 3 30 3
325. s ia a remote terminal interface protocol which allows remote login capability into a system on a network from any other node on that network that is also running TELNET TELNET is a TCP IP application AEM NB R1 5 GL 10 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Glossary Test Access Path TAP There are up to two TAPs one consisting of two pairs TAP B and the other of six pairs TAP A both providing in ternal and external metallic test access to the circuits Test Session This is the procedure including all necessary functions to test a subscriber This includes the setup of the test path as well as the release of the test equipment The test session runs in the NE Time This represents a 24 hour clock function Timeslot Management Channel TMC This is a duplicated DSO data link that a TR 303 VRT and Local Digital Switch LDS use to exchange connection control information with each other as they set up and tear down DSO paths through the system on a per call basis TL1 Transaction Language 1 This is a bellcore standard message language It is the primary means of operating and maintaining the V5DLC system A TL1 message session supports bi directional message transmission and when a TL1 link is established the system can initiate autonomous messages to monitor alarms and changes in system status TR303 VRT TR303 Virtual Remote Terminal This refers to the logical portion of the NE that supports a single TR303 interface acting as a TR303 RDT
326. s user should be deleted If such a message is displayed you must confirm the deletion of these data 3 6 3 1 Backup Procedure The backup operation needs no user interaction after the backup command was executed 3 6 3 2 Archive Procedure The archive operation needs no user interaction after the archive command was executed 3 6 3 3 Restore Procedure 3 6 3 3 1 General Default Locations When a backup is restored all files are restored to their original location When for Restored Data archives are restored they are copied into the directory restored relative to the main installation directory Restore One of Sev When more than one backup is placed on a tape and a particular one shall be re eral Backups from stored the name of this backup must be known and the tape must be positioned Tape at the beginning of this backup The name can be determined by using the tar command For example tar tvf dev rmt Omn The positioning is done as described below Position Tape If you know the order of the backups on tape you can position the tape at the be ginning of the desired backup as follows Rewind the tape e g with mt f dev rmt Om rewind and issue a tar command see example above until the backup which comes before the one which shall be restored is displayed If you do not know the order of the backups on the tape it can be deter mined as follows Rewind the tape and then repeatedly issue a tar command see example above un
327. sal router s multicast address so GSI that the NE points to the router on the other side of the ROC interface The following TL1 commands are an example of ROC over SPLL configuration for TR 303 in the NE ent t0 v3dp 1 49 gsfn 4do ent crs t0 v3dp 1 49 roc 1 ent crs t1 ds1 1 1 1 v3fdr 1 3 set ip shelf 135 5 78 2 defrouter 224 0 0 2 submask 255 255 255 0 The nail up of the DSO channel must also be provisioned in the LDS after that the ROC over SPLL is provisioned Once communications with the element man ager is established via the ROC over SPLL remote operations on the NE can be executed as over a connection via LAN Also either the GSI NB or a standard win dows FTP TELNET can be used A 6 1 3 Element Manager Server Configura tion Server IP Parame The server on which the AEM NB application resides must have its IP parameters ters configured m IP address e g 135 88 20 234 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 m default router e g 135 88 17 1 Configuration In the AEM NB the following parameters have to be configured to be able to com municate with the NEs m TCP IP configuration related to NEs For every NE the AEM NB wants to communicate with its IP ad dress e g 135 88 4 2 must be introduced in the AEM NB provi sionable via AEM NB GUI The ports to be used in the NE needs to be stored in the AEM NB e g for TL1 over TELNET communication the ports to be used are in the order
328. several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Down moves the window from the top of the pile to the very bottom Refresh The contents of the windows on the screen and the screen backdrop are refreshed Minimize Re The workspace manager window Is reduced to an icon or if store Front Panel already iconized restored to a window Restart Work The workspace manager is restarted Some of the changes space Manager to the user interface become valid only after the restart of the workspace manager The restart must be acknowledged in a window Log out A logout from the system can be initiated 3 3 10 Controls in AEM NB Windows Introduction The windows of the AEM NB display certain controls buttons text fields etc These controls are the same in all AEM NB windows and explained in this chap ter Grayed Controls All controls within a window can be activated by clicking on them only if they are not grayed AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 13 System Management General Information on Keyboard and Windows a SeSe Shelf Protection Of x Tab tH COMDAC I0 D51 ME Name Protection Schema Protection Schema Text Box Protection Switching I0 D51 ds1 1 1 0 Menu Button Active Suvitth Request Protection State Protection Switch Radio Button Clear i Inhibit Forced Switch to Protection Apply Push Button Manual Switch to Protection Close Figure 3 8 Exam
329. ssue 2 09 99 5 89 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning E SeSe 5 4 7 Add VRT VB Logical T0 Subscriber Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected the Logical TO is not yet created and the Physical Line drop or roc is not in use by any other Logical TO The following figure shows a block diagram of TO cross connections Physical Distribution Port Circuits in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 PLN 1 a AP PLN 2 EJ LLN CRV 2048 LLN 1 TR 08 TO Cross a AP VRT Connection H6 LLN 96 PLN 512 PLN 513 CU S a PLN 608 Figure 5 38 T0 Cross Connections Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a Logical TO of a VRT VB Step Procedure d Select All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type gt VRT VB id in the Network Browser and Edit Logical To List via the cursor menu or select Service gt Logical TO List via the Menu bar The Logical TO List window pops up This window can also be reached with All gt NE gt Logical TO List via the cursor menu AEM NB R1 5 5 90 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Logical TO List NE Name ne5 Selection Criteria Display All VRT VBs Hin 20s appt eat Sie J PRE JINA None Saias e asea fives Logical TOs List VRT VB ID Logical TO ID Physical Port ID GSFN inadsO 1 1 drop 1 1 3 2NOS inadsO 1 2 2L5 inadsO 1
330. system Logical DSO The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DSO 64 kbps service or facility TR 303 logical line DSO Logical DS1 The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TR 303 logical feeder DS1 Logical Feeder DS1 Numbers These are the identifiers 1 to 28 for the TR 303 VRT of the VRT feeder DS1s that are used by the real time call processing software of the TR 303 Local Digital Switch LDS and in communicating with the VRT over the TMC and or EOC about these feeder DS1s The AnyMedia Access System provides only 20 physical feeder DS1 ports so only a subset of the logical feeder DS1s can be in service Logical Line This is a logical customer termination provided by the NE on either a TR 303 TR 08 VRT or an INA VB Logical Line Number LLN This is the Access Dentifier AID used externally by the Element Manager to identify uniquely a VRT or INA Vir tual Bank distribution side logical drop M MAC Address This is a 6 byte hardware address which identifies a unique participant worldwide in an Ethernet LAN A MAC ad dress is used in OSI layer 2 Manual normal Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only is in service and not faulty Migration This refers to converting an NE from one sof
331. t NE power up Default value CM nefiles NVDS All paths showed as default value are relative to the AnyMedia installation path CM directoryNVPS OAM backup archiveDirectory OAM backup backupDirectory OAM backup backupLogDirec tory OAM backup numberOfLog Files OAM log directoryCurrentLogs OAM log directoryRestored Logs OAM log maximum Total LogsSize NVPS files location It keeps software program data It resides in the NE lt COMDAC gt Default value CM nefiles NVPS default path or device like a Tape unit where the AnyMedia archives will be placed Default value archives default path or device like a Tape unit where the AnyMedia backups will be placed Default value backups default path where the backup s logs will be placed Default value tmp maximum number of backup s log files Range of values 1 to 10 Default value 10 default path where the AnyMedia logs will be placed Default value log default path where the AnyMedia restored logs will be placed Default value restored maximum size in kilobytes for all AnyMedia log files Range of values 10000 to 20000 Default value 15000 AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 2 45 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters ee configuration parameter name description OAM log minimumDaysKept log s latency period in days Range of values 5 to 10 Default value 7 2 3 3 AnyMedia clien
332. t lt GUI gt configuration variables The following table provides an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia GUI AEM NB R1 5 2 46 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Configuration Parameters I Table 2 4 SystemPreferences ini configuration file configuration parameter name description SITE the city or the location where the Element Manager is working This value is used for printing purposes LOC_TIME_ZONE code for the representation of names of time zones Site Settings Range of values GMT Greenwich Mean Time ECT European Central Time Default value defined at installation time User View Settings USERVIEW default view in User Administration window Range of values users usergroups do mains or objects Default value users Alarm Viewer Set ALM VIEW default view tings Range of values view1 view2 view3 or view4 Default value view1 ALM_FILTER default alarm filter Range of values Last24h CritRaised Raised Host CritNotCleared OwnedAck Clear AllAck or All Default value Last24h gt NOTE The following parameters are used for alarms notification purposes The notification can be either a visual effect in the AnyMedia GUI main win dow the flag icon changes to up state and the count of notified alarms is increased or and audio effect a beep sound is generated VISUAL CRITICAL _ ALARM_SEV enab
333. t Configuration Domain Selection HE Name Huahe Domain Selection E Available domains Selected Domains Damain Figure 5 7 Domain Selection Window Assign Domain At creation time the NE must be included in one or several domains for domain creation see chapter 4 The Domain Section window consists of two lists Avail able Domains and Selected Domains This window provides the user with the facilities needed to select the domains from which the NE will be accessible 4 Use the Add gt gt button to move the selected NE from the Available Do mains list box to the Selected Domains one Use lt lt Remove to remove domains from the Selected Domains list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected a domain name from the corresponding list 5 Press Apply to confirm In the NE Name Information window the fields Communications Info Authentication and Connection are now displayed The Connection State is set to Not Connected see step 7 gt NOTE If you decide to close this window via Close or window controls a Warn ing window pops up informing you of the possible rejection of the NE cre ation At least 1 domain must be selected Otherwise the NE creation operation will be rejected Do you want to go back to Domain Selection AEM NB R1 5 5 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Connect NE 363 211 402 Equipment Con
334. t Required Apply Protection State working Protection Ongoing Tasks I epy Mam m Progress J Sw Bewinboed in Progress Close LX Figure 5 25 COMDAC Window This window includes hardware and software data inventory as well as the operational and protection state AEM NB R1 5 5 58 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration The Inventory Information pane contains read only fields cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 4 page 5 30 For configuring the protection scheme the pane Operation amp Protection is used Parameters Buttons Description Slot This non editable field shows which one of the two slots is being used comdac 1 1 2 Slot Required Slot required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator as long as the circuit pack is not inserted However it is not possible to set both COMDACs to not required The Apply button is available only if both COMDACs are present and the user modifies the required state of one of them from Required to Not Required Protection State This non editable field shows whether the selected COMDAC is working or not Working providing ser vice or Standby not in service Protection This button provides access to the Shelf Protection window COMDAC tab to allow you to modify the current protection scheme or perform protection switching cf Chapter 5 3 2 7 1 page 5 60 2 Deselect the ch
335. t and Maintenance Ee Not Connected The user can initiate the connection establishment process with an NE in connec tion state NOT CONNECTED After initiating this process the NE state changes to NOT_CONNECTED TRYING Not Connected When the NE state is NOT CONNECTED TRYING the AEM NB tries to estab Trying lish a TCP IP connection with the NE The AEM NB attempts to connect to one of the TCP ports of the NE After the successful connection to a TCP port the AEM NB checks if it supports the software version of the NE If the software version is supported the NE state becomes CONNECTED SYNCHRONIZING if not it re mains NOT_CONNECTED TRYING and the AEM NB continues its attempts to establish a connection The user can cancel these attempts via the GUI which will change the NE state to NOT_ CONNECTED CANCELLING Connected The user can request to close a connection with an NE via the GUI When the TL1 communication session is closed by the AEM NB the NE state is changed to NOT CONNECTED When the NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP con nection is lost or closed the NE state becomes NOT _CONNECTED TRYING When a TL1 communication session loss is detected and the TCP IP connection is still established the AEM NB closes the TCP IP connection and the NE state also becomes NOT_CONNECTED TRYING 6 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association General If an NE is connected to the AEM NB the databases of NE and AEM NB have
336. ted at which port of the bridge Data packets are only transferred over the bridge if the participant is at another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from a certain part of a LAN Built in Self Test BIST This is a procedure executed by each plug in circuit pack either after power up or on demand The task is to check the functions of the hardware Burst Load Load that can occur in certain well known circumstances where response times are no longer guaranteed but queues handle excess traffic After removing the causes of the burst load and a certain settling time normal oper ation is resumed During burst load there is a graceful degradation no loss of information only a queueing occurs to defer the load to a later moment Busy Hour Load Maximum load that is expected to occur in real life that must be handled with normal response times c C Call Reference Value CRV This is a numeric value used to identify a logical line on a TR 303 Virtual Remote Terminal VRT in messages ex changed between the HDT and the TR 303 switch when setting up and tearing down individual calls For TR 303 VRTs the CRV is identical to the last field in the AID for a logical line e g 104 is the CRV for the logical line having AID v3dp 1 104 CRVs are numbered between 1 and 2048 A maximum of 672 provisioned logical lines are sup ported by the AnyMedia Access System R1 2 A CRV can be uniquely associated with a single Distribution
337. tenance Test Management 6 4 Test Management Main Functions The test management provides all the general purpose test functionality The main functions are m Providing the user with different test options see below m 8 Starting the test execution by means of the AEM NB m Displaying the test results on the AEM NB user interface and m Setting and clearing of loopbacks Test Options The following test options are available Port test cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 24 m Application Pack AP card test cf Chapter 6 4 2 page 6 26 m Standby card test scheduling cf Chapter 6 4 3 page 6 28 Built in self test cf Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 29 m Loopback test at the feeder side cf Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 29 Access to the The test routines are available via the Configuration Manager application To Testroutines Start it click Config Manager in the Access Bar The Configuration Manager win dow and the Network Browser pop up cf Figure 6 8 Configuration Manager File Edit View Equipment Service Alarms TestManager TL1 Help E H A Biods1 1 2 H Biodsi 1 3 H Biodsi 1 4 H Biiodsi 1 5 ll iods 1p 1 fp 1 41 fer ROG2W MePoTss2 asDNi6 f ebp 1 5 feb 1 6 feb 1 7 f ebp 1 8 f ebp 1 9 feb 1 10 f bp 1 11 fp 1 12 f lebp 1 13 H Bihp i 14 f Mebp 1 15 H Bbp i 16 eins 2 1 ala ATVB List Bl lerR303 Berros aA l eLogical TO List i Bl ogical DSi List Figure 6 8 Window Configuration Ma
338. tep Procedure 1 Check the TCP IP communication addresses Are the TCP IP communication addresses correct Yes Continue with step 2 No Correct the addresses Continue with step 4 2 Check the gateway NE identification AEM NB R1 5 6 40 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms Is the gateway NE identification correct Yes Continue with step 3 No Correct the identification Continue with step 4 3 Check the Data Communication Network DCN Is the DCN in service Yes Continue with step 4 No Bring the DCN into service 4 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 6 6 4 7 TL1_COMM_DENIED Meaning User login for a TL1 communication session was denied by the NE for all TCP IP connections opened Abbreviation TL1_COMM_DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when a TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and the NE has been successfully opened Effects It is not possible to manage the NE because there is no TL1 communication ses sion available Possible Cause s A user login error is stopping the TL1 communication session establishment pro cess between the AEM NB and the NE Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct User Identification user login Password and NE target identifier TID AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 41 Fault
339. th cases the system informs about if files has been installed on the system In this case the administrator must use the pkgrm command to remove the instal lation 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package Installa tions In order to remove any AnyMedia package installations the administrator must ex ecute the command pkgrm lt Package_Name gt gt NOTE Refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 to obtain the AnyMedia packages names When a package Is removed all files installed by it or created during the AnyMe dia operation such as data bases and temporal data files are erased in the target system 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers package Complete the following procedure to remove the AnyMedia Servers package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Type pkgrm LuANY16S and press Return The following package is currently installed LUANY16S AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 server sparc LUANY16S_ X Xc Do you want to remove this package AEM NB R1 5 2 40 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a 3 Type y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LUANY16S gt This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of removing this package Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q 4 Type y and press Return Verifying package dependencies Processing package informat
340. the MDSU 1 pack serves the first 12 slots slots 1 through 12 on the MDS2 the MDSU 2 pack serves the remaining 12 slots 13 through 24 The MDS2 MDS2B Shelf may be equipped so that only half of the shelf is opera tional 12 channel units For this case only one MDSU is needed in the AnyMe dia Shelf A partially equipped half MDS2 Shelf requires one PTU Power Test Unit and one MSC The MDSUs utilize the same timing signals as the narrowband APs A single 8 MHz clock and 8 kHz sync are supplied by an MDSU to an MCS in the MDS2 MSD2B for timing the MDS2 MSD2B link Side selection of the clock and sync from the COMDACs is performed by the MDSU The MDS2 shelf shown in Figure 5 2 is arranged to accommodate 12 CU circuit packs a PTU and an MSC pack per section The first or left section is a mirror image of the second or right section Fuses and Jacks 5 gt D D D D gt gt D D gt gt gt D D OJOJO JOJO JOJOIO JO JO OI O 1 12 Figure 5 2 MDS2 Shelf Layout The MDS2B shelf shown in Figure 5 3 page 5 4 is arranged to accomodate 12 CU circuit packs a PTU and MSC pack pre section The fist or top section is a mirror image of the second or down section AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 3 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview c c Fuses and Jacks DDM 2000 Figure 5 3 MDS2B Shelf Layout The MSC provides the required shelf interface and central control for half of the ae e
341. the pass through interface have been encountered Abbreviation PASS_VIOLATION Severity Information Service affecting No Effects None Possible Cause s An external Operations System OS is trying to open a pass through link without being authorized Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Ask your system administrator for more details on access control AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 6 39 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms me 6 6 4 5 SWVR_ILLEGAL Meaning The Software Version currently stored in the NE is not supported by the AEM NB Abbreviation SWVR_ILLEGAL Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible Cause s The Software Version currently stored in the NE is not supported by the AEM NB Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check that the correct version of software is installed on the NE s System Controller Card COMDAC 6 6 4 6 TCP IP_CON_REFUSED Meaning The TCP IP connection establishment could not be completed successfully for port numbers 11001 11003 11005 and 11007 Abbreviation TCP IP_CON_ REFUSED Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible Cause s Some TCP IP protocol errors stopped the connection establishment process be tween AEM NB and NE Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm S
342. til the backup to be restored is displayed while you note the order of the backups on tape Then you can position the tape as shown above AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 3 27 System Management Backup and Restore BE SeSe 3 6 3 3 2 Full Restoration Procedure When the restore command is executed the user must decide which image type should be restored The restore script displays the following message Please enter the type of the image to be restored backup archive Type backup or archive and press Enter Copy of Originals Copies of the original databases are saved to allow for a cancellation of the oper ation If such a copy could not be made the appropriate image can nevertheless be restored but a warning is issued For each database for which no copy could be made the following message is displayed Actual lt DATABASE TYPE gt is not present or ObjectStore copy operation failed The AnyMedia NB EM system state cannot be recovered if a cancellation is requested Do you want to continue y n Type y and press Enter to continue with the restore procedure If you type n the restore command stops with an error message no data are restored and the sys tem will not work unless a correct restore is performed When the original data bases are present the message above is not displayed Additional Incre While the different databases are restored certain information is displayed on the mental Backups screen Then the rest
343. tion with the supported NE The hardware identifiers include all plug in units m Maintain a local Copy of NE Provisioning Configuration Data The AEM NB maintains a local copy of all cross connection and parameter settings for each NE This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE m Maintain NE Software Copies The system keeps a copy of the versions of the NE software running in the NEs managed by the AEM NB FAST 24 channel FAST 30 channel SDH Generally only one version of NE software per NE type is used by all the NEs in a network but the AEM NB must have the capacity to man age two software versions during the upgrade period AEM NB R1 5 1 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee m NE Reset INIT SYS Allows the user to delete the NE and restore the factory settings for the whole NVDS except for the IP address so that the AEM NB can still com municate with the NE after the command execution has been completed m AEM NB Database Synchronization Automatic update of the AEM NB database records based on NE database changes m Protection Control The management system provides a facility to allow the user to switch op eration of one unit in a NE to a standby unit if that unit exists Equipment Protection The AEM NB allows the user to provision the equipment information for the protection scheme
344. tions for starting and terminating the alarm viewer Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 10 Instructions for handling the alarm viewer Chapter 6 3 3 page 6 11 Structure of the alarm viewer window Chapter 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 and Chapter 6 3 3 4 page 6 15 System management Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 Alarm viewer functions Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Starting the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be started in different ways Clicking on the icon Alarm Viewer in the Access Bar cf page 3 4 Chapter 3 2 3 Clicking on Alarms in the menu bar of the other Element Manager applica tions cf Chapter 3 3 6 page 3 11 In this case only alarms of the NE which is selected in the Network Browser are shown The displayed window has the title Alarm Viewer and maintains similarities with the other AEM NB s windows The Alarm Viewer window consists of the sections 6 3 6 3 1 General Overview What you will find m E E 6 3 2 Viewer 6 3 2 1 E E a a i a 6 10 Issue2 09 99 Menu bar File Views Filters Actions Help Toolbar buttons for Acknowledge Clear and Reload General Information section Alarm table AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Alarm Viewer File View Filter Actions Options Help Acknowledge Clear Reload m General Information Critical s Major i Minor 4 Information o Total 21
345. tions of the Application Pack window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the AP is plugged in Format ap 1 16 Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 5 1 page 5 37 Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Possible values cf Table 5 1 page 5 37 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among plug ins to specify forward backward compati bility Format of the ICC is Sm n where m is the Issue num ber and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspon dence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp The check box Slot Required displays the required state of Protection the shelf slot This state can be changed only if the card is not inserted The Apply button is available only if the required state of the AP has been modified from Required to Not Required AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 35 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configur
346. to know about any cut through session running on the AEM NB platform The performance of the system could be affected by the load of the hardware but the behavior of the GUI is the same in both cases Complete the following procedure to start a TL1 session 1 Select All gt NE in Network Browser 2 Select TL1 gt Cut through via the Menu bar to start a TL1 session The Cut through window pops up AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 5 121 Configuration Management Provisioning Fiber Reach Cut Through nes Trying te connect Login in dnyMedia Server failed Figure 5 47 Cut Through Window 3 Enter the Login and Password as defined in the NE Name Information window cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 Now you are able to enter the appropriate TL1 commands 5 9 Fiber Reach Overview The AEM NB provides an interface to a ITM SNC Integrated Transport Manage ment Sub NetworkController session with any DDM 2000 Fiber Reach compo nent on the transport network that interacts with the AnyMedia Access System Using this software package the user can retrieve alarms and configuration re lated to the transport sub network The Fiber Reach interface is used by remote login when the operator wants to lo cate a failure or defect that is shown on the access system that have been origi nated in the transport network The GUI interface and the ITM SNC are totally in dependent from each other because they are operating on different NEs
347. to the limit imposed by the 20 available DS1 network interfaces A physical distribution port may be assigned to only 1 logical line on 1 VRT or INA VB similarly a logical line can be assigned to only 1 physical distribution port TR 303 VRT The single TR 303 VRT can support any number of physical lines up to the full 608 line maximum capacity of the AnyMedia Access System The logical lines of the TR 303 VRT are identified by Call Reference Values CRVs which may be any of 672 integer values from 1 to 2048 A physical distribution port in the system can be assigned to any CRV of the TR 303 VRT The TR 303 VRT includes full access concentration between its logical line DSOs and available time slots on the feeder DS1s 24 time slots associated with the VRT full access means that if there is an available feeder time slot it is possible to assign a logical line DSO to that time slot For time slot management the TR303 VRT supports the following process AEM NB R1 5 5 70 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning as Dynamic time slot assignment a time slot assignment made over the Timeslot Management Channel TMC for locally switched application This time slot as signment deassignment is done on a per call basis under control of the LDS Semi permanent time slot assignment a time slot assignment made over the Embedded Operation Channel EOC for providing a dedicated voice data path This ti
348. traffic control A bridge is a network layer device that passes packets between two or more net work segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is on which port of the bridge Data packets are only trans ferred over the bridge if the participant is on another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN A A NE Communication Capabili ties A 2 Issue2 09 99 In this section the management communication capabilities an AnyMedia NE are described The AnyMedia Access System provides the following management in terfaces for operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P Craft interface terminal CIT The CIT port is a local EIA 232D former RS 232C interface It is located on the faceplate of the CTU card in the AnyMedia Access System for 24 channel market Either a TL1 ASCII terminal or a PC based Graphical Sys tem Interface GSI NB can be connected to the CIT port locally This inter face is typically used during initial installation and other maintenance re lated activities This interface can also be used to remotely manage the NE AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration NE Communication Capabilities using the AEM NB GSI NB
349. ts and without external OS LAN 1 28 1 5 3 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN 1 29 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 30 WM SS 2 Software Installation and Commissioning 2 1 2 1 General 2 1 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 2 2 Installation Procedure 29 2 2 1 Full Installation 2 6 2 2 2 Individuals Package Installations 2 36 2 2 3 Cancel Installation 2 40 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package Installations 2 40 2 3 Configuration Parameters 2 44 2 3 1 Introduction 2 44 2 3 2 AnyMedia Server Configuration Parameters 2 44 2 3 3 AnyMedia client lt GUI gt configuration variables 2 46 3 System Management 3 1 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 System Access 3 2 3 2 1 Login to Operation System 3 2 3 2 2 Logout from Operation System 3 3 3 2 3 AEM NB Access Bar 3 4 3 2 4 Capacity 3 5 3 3 General Information on Keyboard and Windows 3 6 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 6 3 3 2 Mouse 3 6 333 Different Aspects of the Cursor 3 7 3 3 4 Basics on Windows 3 7 3 3 5 Window Menu 3 10 3 3 6 Menu Bar 3 3 7 Cursor Menu Q i Q i i AEM NB R1 5 IV Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Contents 3 3 8 Workspace Manager 3 12 3 3 9 Workspace Menu 3 12 3 3 10 Controls in AEM NB Windows 3 13 3 4 Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 17 3 4 1 General on Applications 3 17 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications 3 18 3 4 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via GUI 3 18 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via Command Line 3 20 3 4 5 Dei
350. ttons Description Physical Port id This field displays the physical Port id cross connected to the Logical TO Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 for APs m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 for CUs gt NOTE When coming from the Application Pack window Add Logical T0 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 34 or the Physical Port id cursor menu Network Browser this field is populated and editable Expected Pack In order to provide service the subscriber has to be as Type signed to the proper Application Pack To ensure that the service requested will work the user should enter the CLEI code of the circuit pack that is supposed to provide that type of service Since CLEI codes are completely meaningless the GUI offers an option menu of the circuit pack types sup ported cf Table 5 1 page 5 37 and Table 5 2 page 5 45 Therefore the user is able to select one of these types that internally is to be mapped to its corresponding CLEI code Red Line This check box is used to identify red lined subscribers gt NOTE A special warning message appears when red lined Logical TOs are to be edited cf Chapter 5 4 9 page 5 112 Label The function of this label button depends on the situation Possible values are Apply or Delete Apply will be displayed whenever Add Logical TO has been selected or Edit Logical T0 has been chosen and at least one parameter has been modified Delete will be active when coming from Edit
351. tware release to another by installing a different software release Module An executable installed on a Host N NE AnyMedia Access System Network Element NEM Network Element Management Subsystem AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 GL 7 Glossary B Non Volatile Data Storage NVDS This refers to a capability of the AnyMedia Access System to store information in such a way as to survive indefi nite periods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS and hence are the parameter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Non Volatile Program Storage NVPS This keeps software program data It resides in the COMDAC Normal Hour Load The average load expected during the lifetime of the system O Off line Backups These are backups performed automatically via any scheduling mechanisms e g cron file On line Backups These are backups performed on user demand Operator This refers to the AnyMedia Element Manager users Operator Mode Testing initiated by staff from the EM using the NE integrated capabilities These tests can last some time e g some measurements can be executed several times during a test session The results in this mode usually are val ues e g resistance voltage and pass fail decisions Overload The load that causes the system to take drastic measures to ensure its integrity During overload normal system function is
352. twork DDS Digital Data System DFL Default DID Direct Inward Dial DPT Dial Pulse Termination eee E ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in EIA Electronic Industries Association EM Element Manager EM AM Element Manager AnyMedia ENT Enter EOC Embedded Operations Channel EQPT Equipment ESF Extended Super Frame ETO Equalized Transmission Only EVT Event AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 AB 3 Abbreviations E SS eee F FAF Facility Failure FEF Family of Equipment Failure FLT Fault FS SuperFrame with Datalink FTP File Transfer Protocol FXO Foreign Exchange Office G GS Ground Start GSF General Service Function GSFN Generic Signalling Function GSI Graphical System Interface GUI Graphical User Interface H HBER High Bit Error Ratio HDD Hard Disk Drive HDLC High Level Data Link Control HP Hewlett Packard HW Hardware AEM NB R1 5 AB 4 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Abbreviations i SSS See I ICC InterChangeability Code ICMS Integrated Configuration Management System ID Identifier IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IIOP Internet Interoperability Protocol IN Information alarm severity INA Integrated Network Access IP Internet Protocol IS In Service ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITM SNC Integrated Transport Management Sub Networ
353. ue identification of the object NE_Id or EM which has sent a TL1 message or has received an action AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 System Management Log Management ae Table 3 23 Information Displayed in the Log Viewer Table Column Meaning Method A string explaining the performed action Parameters m For Actions and System Internal Events Shows all parameters involved in the action m For Autonomous Reports Shows all TL1 message parameters in the order they were received for TL1 messages sent from NE and all alarm fields except Description for platform alarms Event Type The event which happened in the AEM NB Log Types and Dis Depending on the chosen log type the table in the Log Viewer displays different in played Information formation more or less columns The following table shows which information is displayed for which log type Table 3 24 Log Types Log Type Contents Actions Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Method Pa rameters System Internal Events Date amp Time Object Event Type Parameters Autonomous Report Date amp Time Parameters NE_Id Menus and Func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the Log Viewer and their tions functions Table 3 25 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function File gt New Start up a new Log Viewer File gt Reload Update the displayed Log Viewer table with newly logged items File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all logged items dis
354. ult 600 Balance This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 15 Receive Gain This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 1 Transmit Gain This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 Slope SL This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signalling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO Remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM NB R1 5 5 106 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Ene 5 4 7 11 Overview 363 211 402 Service Provisioning Service Details GSFN FXO The FXO foreign exchange office function is used for a non locally or locally switched loop or ground start application It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit Service Details Parameters Impedance Balance Receive Gain Transmit Gain Slope Toll Diversion Trunk Condition On Hook Trans mission LS GS Description The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible
355. up User Administratio File view Help Figure 4 21 Window User Administration AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 17 User Management User Groups Eee 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears User Administration a ooo Administrater Administrater Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Group Description Figure 4 22 User Groups Table AEM NB R1 5 4 18 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 User Management User Groups 4 Click New The User Group Profile window pops up User Group Profile Figure 4 23 Window User Group Profile 5 Enter a new user group name in the User Group Name field this is man datory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional O to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Click Users 7 Select one or more users that shall belong to the new user group in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 2 8 Click Domains 9 Select one or more domains the user group shall has access to in the Do mains Not Assigned field and click Add AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 4 19 User Management 4 20 Issue 2 09 99 gt NOTE User Groups If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE
356. valuable for the equipment supplier about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from the NE which imply changes in the AEM NB database 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs Log size The following values can be configured conf Chapter 3 8 page 3 38 for the log system by the administrator m Minimum number of days incl current day in the log default 7 days m Maximum size of all logged data default 15 Mbyte Log Grows Too Big The logs are stored as separate files one file holds one day of one log type If the size of the logged data has reached the size limit and a new event to be logged occurs some of the already logged data has to be deleted The oldest recorded AEM NB R1 5 3 32 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 System Management Log Management a SeS day of one of the logs holding the largest number of days is always deleted The log system determines which log shall be shortened as follows Table 3 21 How the Log be Shortened is Determined If then the log system will only one log holds more days than the delete oldest recorded day of this log others the longest logs hold the same number delete oldest recorded day of the log of days and the log for which an event for which an event shall be logged shall be logged is among these logs the longest logs hold the same number select one of the longest logs in the of days and the log for which an event following order Autonomous Report sha
357. via File Transfer Protocol cut through TL1 over raw TCP is also supported TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 10Basel at layer 1 10BaselT at layer 1 Figure A 4 AEM NB Protocol Profiles A 6 Sample DCN Configurations Having in mind the management communications capabilities of the AnyMedia NE and EM two DCN scenarios have been selected as sample configurations A 6 1 Remote Operations Channel Over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN Configuration The assumptions for this configuration are m The LAN based element manager is located in the central office collocated with the Local Digital Switch LDS m The NEs are located at remote locations m The OAM amp P information mapped in the 64 kbit s ROCs is transported from the AEM NB in the central office to the remote locations via a semi permanent leased line SPLL using either TR 08 or TR 303 access tech nologies A router bridge is used for interfacing the channelized T1 I F to the LAN in the central office The router bridge performs the translation from LAN to HDLC DSO access via channelized T1 interfaces AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue2 09 99 A 5 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Sample DCN Configurations o ee ea m For layer 2 the HDLC Protocol is used between 24 channel NEs and the router m One remote operation channel is used for communicating with each NE 6
358. visioning Service Provisioning ELE and or Logical TOs and for modifying VRT VB specific parameters when applica ble Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the pane VRT VB List VRT VB List Selected criterion is All VRT VB The list will display all VRT VB ids Selected criterion is TR 303 or TR 08 or INA In these cases only the VRT VB ids of the selected type will be displayed The VRT VB table provides a scroll bar to allow access to all VRT VB ids VRT VB id format v303 1 for TR 303 v08 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Upon selection of any entry the Edit VRT VB button be comes available 2 Use the radio buttons to choose a desired VRT VB 3 Select an appropriate entry in the list click on Edit VRT VB or double click on the entry The VRT VB window pops up gt NOTE Figure 5 32 page 5 75 shows the VRT VB window for TR 303 Only for this interface type the panes VFDE and Datalink amp Protection are available For TR 08 and INA are only the panes Actions and Operational State are available Only these two panes are shown in the corresponding windows AEM NB R1 5 5 74 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Figure 5 32 VRT VB Window This window provides access to the lists of Logical DS1s and Logical TOs as well as allowing addition of Lo
359. when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected PT red Lit when a fault is detected on the circuit pack Lit when a channel served by the PTU is under test AEM NB R1 5 5 26 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ae 5 3 2 1 3 Configure IO DS1 The IO DS1 circuit pack provides four physical DS1 interfaces to accommodate telephony via standard TR 08 TR 303 and INA network interfaces This window can be displayed even when the circuit pack is not plugged in Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the IO DS1 data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt IO DS1 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the Menu bar or single click on the circuit pack O DS17 in Shelf View window The O DS1 window pops up ME Name Slot Mumber vale Inventory Data Card Type serial Mumber Aparatus Gade ICE LEI ECI Oo m Operation amp Protection M Slot Required ESEN Frotection State Mot Equipped Protection Physical O17 Information Physical Da1 Logical Oss ID Figure 5 14 IO DS1 Window AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 27 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration o E ee The following table shows the view edit options of the O DS1 window Parameters Buttons Descriptio
360. will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXWRT gt y n 62 Type y and press Return AEM NB R1 5 2 30 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure a Installing OrbixWeb 3 0 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOXWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXWRT 1log Installation of lt LUuOXWRT gt was successful AnyMedia Help In Processing package instance lt LuANY16en gt from stallation lt tmp lucent_pkg 4 gt AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Help sparc LUANY16en_US_X X n kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk a AnyMedia Element Manager x c 1999 Lucent Technologies n kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkk OK No previous package LuANY16en have been found Where should AnyMediaNBEM Help be installed opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM_R1 5 Help q 63 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files Enter a valid owner 64 Type a valid user and press Return Enter a valid group 65 Type a valid group and press Return Using lt gt as the
361. within the AMS For this purpose the multiple key defined above has to be used AEM NB R1 5 6 36 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms ee 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms Alarm Descriptions Please refer to the AMAS R1 2 network element documentation for detailed alarm descriptions of network element alarms 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms This chapter provides alarm descriptions of the AEM NB platform alarms includ ing proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical Order In the following the AEM NB platform alarms are listed alphabetically 6 6 4 1 LOG_DEL_FULL Meaning All old logs have been deleted Because more available space was necessary the log type of the current day has been deleted too The Object_ld shows which log type has been deleted Abbreviation LOG DEL FULL Severity Major Service affecting No Effects There are no old logs available and not all logs of the current day are available to be viewed or stored Possible Cause s There may be a problem or abnormal situation in the AEM NB or the selection of the configurable size limits of the log system was too small Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the AEM NB for problems or abnormal situations Have there any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 2
362. work element NE Abbreviation NEASSOC_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when the TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session are available and the software version currently stored in the NE is sup ported by the AEM NB i e when the association process between the AEM NB and the NE is completed NE state is CONNECTED cf Chapter 6 5 1 page 6 31 AEM NB R1 5 6 38 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms Effects lt is not possible to manage the NE The TL1 communication session and the TCP IP connection are lost Possible Cause s A loss of the TCP IP connection has been detected or the TCP IP connection has been closed as a consequence of a loss of the TL1 communication session Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the NE state after a waiting period of 1 minute Comment When NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP connec tion is lost or closed the NE state is moved to TRYING and the loop process to re establish the connection with the NE is started by the AEM NB Is the state CONNECTED Yes O K No Continue with step 2 2 Check for Data Communication Network DCN being in service Is the DCN in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 6 6 4 4 PASS_VIOLATION Meaning Pass through security violation More than three consecutive log in attempts on
363. y TMCs Only available if both working and standby TMCs are present and the standby path is not out of service Forced Switch button Performs a forced switch be tween working and standby TMCs Only available if both working and standby TMCs are present and re gardless of the service condition of the standby path AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Issue 2 09 99 5 77 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Le 5 4 2 Logical DS1 List Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit the Logical DS1 List Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt VRT VBs List gt VRT VB Type TR 303 TR 08 INA gt VAT VB id in the Network Browser and Edit Logical DS1 List via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Logical DS1 List via the Menu bar The Logical DS1 List window pops up Logical DS1 List NE Name nes Selection Criteria Display All VRT VBs _ TR 303 fe oe ets cae JPR SE ihe None PiN t Mod od Pe Saree Yn eye PURSE UA 4 Rts S m Logical DS1 List VRT VB ID Logical DS1 ID Physical DS1 Id Figure 5 33 Logical DS1 List Window AEM NB R1 5 5 78 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning a This window displays Logical DS1 id list based on a selection criteria It provides access to Physical DS1 Logical DS1 window for Physical DS1 Logical DS1 pa rameter modification Parameters Buttons Description Se
364. y careful with the packages dependencies showed in Packages dependencies on page 37 This guide shows the flow of the installation according to the interaction with the administrator using the installation script provided in the distribution and using the pkgadd command for individual installations Common Tasks Common actions must be make in both cases as follows m You need to be logged on as root m Get ready your distribution medium Insert and Mount Insert and mount the CD If the machine is running the vold it will recogn the CDROM ise that the CD is in place and mount it on cdrom AnyMediaNBEMR15 depending on your system configuration cdrom AnyMediaNBEMR15 might have to be replaced with a different device name Depending on the configuration of vold you may have to append a trailing dot to refer ences to filenames on the CD This is due to hsfs imposing a suffix on the filenames If the machine is not running the vold type mount F hsfs o ro notraildot dev dsk c0t6d0s2 cdrom The device identifier cOt6d0s2 is configuration dependent and as such will vary from machine to machine This will mount the CD on cdrom depending on your system configura tion cdrom might have to be replaced with a different mount point For more information about on how to mount a CD ROM drive refer to your SUN documentation m Anew user shall be created on the target system who will be the user owner of the AEM N
365. y night due se curity reason The execution time of the cron can be changed by the admin istrator only AEM NB R1 5 Issue 2 09 99 3 3 System Management System Access 3 2 3 AEM NB Access Bar The AEM NB Access Bar allows access to all AEM NB applications and offers an alarm indication as well as a help feature AEM Piel Equipment Users amp Alarm Broad Band Configuration Groups Monitoring Element Mgmt Log System Alarm Help Management Administration Notification Figure 3 2 AEM NB Access Bar Start Access Bar To start the Access Bar click on the access bar icon in the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 Functions The Access Bar provides access to the following applications Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 m Log Management cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 32 m Users amp Groups cf Chapter 4 System Administration cf Chapter 3 4 page 3 17 8 Alarm Monitoring cf Chapter 6 m Alarm Notification cf Chapter 3 2 3 1 page 3 4 m Broad Band Element Management m Help Start applications To start an application click on the respective icon Access Control If an icon of the Access Bar is grayed you are not allowed to access this applica tion or the application is not running Whether access is granted or denied de pends on your user group membership The Alarm Notification and Help icons are always accessible 3 2 3 1 Alarm Notification Icon Description The Alarm Notification
366. y possible action will be delete the cross connection Parameters Buttons Description VRT VB id Depend on the previous action this field displays the already selected VRT VB id or provides an option menu if the DS1 is not yet cross connected to select an appropriate VRT VB id Cross connec The field Physical DS1 is used to enter an appropriate tion Information Physical DS1 to be cross connected When coming from a window in which the Physical DS1 is already defined the corresponding value is displayed and this field is not editable Format ds1 sheltf slot feeder Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 five possible O DS1s per shelf four possible feeders per lO DS1 AEM NB R1 5 363 211 402 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning nn Parameters Buttons Description The field Logical DS1 is used to enter an appropriate Logi cal DS1 id to be cross connected When coming from a window in which the Logical DS1 is al ready defined the corresponding value is displayed and this field is not editable Possible values v8fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Label For the label button two values are possible Add Logical DS1 or Delete Logical DS Add Logical DS1 will be available when the Logical DS1 does not yet exist Delete Logical DS1 will be available when the Logical DS1 does already exist 2 Enter the appropriate Physical DS1 up to 9
367. y son shelf Each MSC is two slots wide but has only one backplane connector An 8 MHz MDS2 link is provided to interface with the AnyMedia Access System shelf On the distribution side the MSC supports 3 4 096 Mbps PCM links for connecting 12 channel units The MSC performs the following functions m Translates between 1 5 AnyMedia Access System PCM Highways and 3 SLC carrier format PCM buses m Performs rate conversion from incoming 8 MHz link and distributes timing and synchronization to CUs m Translates between one AnyMedia Access System UART link and the SLC carrier Bank Controller Link BCL and PTU control interfaces Control and monitoring for CUs and PTUs Composite clock input and DDS Digital Data System timing distribution to CUs m Supports signaling bit translation and signaling state transition detection for DID Direct Inward Dialing services on TR 303 m The MSC is a simplex pack The MSC hardware can support software download AEM NB R1 5 does not support this feature Power Test Units The PTU has power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and PTU 5V power to the MSC Each PTU powers 12 CUs and one MSC Positive and neg ative ringing inputs are looped through each PTU so that each PTU distributes ringing to the 12 CUs it provides power to The PTU can detect the loss of its ring ing inputs The PTU has relays and protectors for test access It also has termina tions and detectors for channel testing Each PTU
368. y testing at regular intervals whether the associa tion to the particular NE is dropped In this case the AEM NB itself raises an alarm Alarm Display on A complete alarm overview and a detailed alarm description is provided by the the User Interface alarm viewer All relevant alarm data e g alarm severity are shown Alarm Logs The AEM NB keeps alarm logs to store the alarm notifications Alarm logs are used among other things for long term observations e g of the fault behaviour in the network Alarm logs exist for pending alarms for the alarm history and for clock events in the network 1 4 3 1 2 Fault Localisation and Diagnosis Reaction to Fault When a fault has been detected it is necessary to localise its source and diag Identification nose its cause in order to initiate appropriate repair procedures To locate the cause of fault the AEM NB provides information gathered from alarm notifications and general network data Fault Source Each alarm notification contains the name of the network component from which it Originates This network component however need not always be the real fault source 1 4 3 1 3 Fault Clearance Background The AEM NB detects faults automatically and clears various software errors by it self fault recovery The transmission characteristics of the network will not be im paired by this Recovery System Recovery protects the AEM NB and associated users from unnecessary Mechanisms problems and av
369. ys in the cleared state and the relevant data is updated AEM NB R1 5 6 8 Issue2 09 99 363 211 402 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Aqitomate alarm lf network and platform alarms are cleared at their source the AEM NB clears them clearance after a variable period of time in the AEM NB database This period of time is set by default to 3 days and can be configured by the user via the system variable AM mini mumClearPerioa in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaNBEM cfg 6 2 8 Alarm Data Synchronization The AMS is responsible for the performance of NE alarm synchronization To ac complish this the AMS requests all the current alarms normal and environment of the NE that is being synchronized Once the AMS has received these alarms it compares them with the alarms stored in the AEM NB alarm database At the end of the synchronization the alarms stored in the alarm database must be the same as the alarms retrieved from the NE AMS Only one synchronization per NE can be performed at the same time The AMS rejects any synchronization request for the same NE if the first one has still not finished 6 2 9 AEM NB Alarm Log Handling If the user wants to know the different states throughout the alarm life the user will have to see the Log System cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 32 in which all alarm changes are stored Three types of logs are used The AMS logs the following situations m Actions log Periodical database deletio

AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents